Home

2016 FIAT 500/500C Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

1. CONTENTS ll POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED 86 Heated Mirrors If Equipped Lowering The Power Top 86 SUN VISOTS ab dae ER esci ane eG eS Re ae a 93 Raising The Power Top 87 MISEATS e une mete ER merele 2 93 Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure 88 Forward Rearward Adjustment 94 Wind Stop isse e e 89 Recline Adjustment 95 B MIRRORS 5 cae Gh deed RI S Rm 89 Seat Height Adjustment 96 Inside Day Night Mirror 89 EZ Entry F ature see Re ad 96 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 90 Memory Feature arietta ebrie 97 O Power Mirrors 0 0 00 91 O Heated Seats If Equipped 97 Folding MirrOIS us esar pea dea sa a ooo 92 Head Restraints 00000054 98 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 102 B WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 109 B LIGHTS seid 2448 ee PEE CODE TES 104 Front Windshield Wiper Operation 110 Multifunction Lever 104 Rear Windshield Wiper 112 Headlights 5 5 dte ade peg 104 Mi TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 113 High Beams 4 3 2224 mid dp IS Rae each S 105 B ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
2. Cavity het Mini Fuse Description 3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node 4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking 5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket Vehicle Radio Climate Control System 6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi Directional Washer 7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window 8 F13 7 5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam Headlamp Leveling 9 F50 7 5 Amp Brown Airbag 10 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch Climate Control System Stop Light Clutch 11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch Instrument Panel Node 12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror GPS Electric Mirror Parking Sensor 13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition Climate Control 14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Underhood Fuses The ID number of the electrical component correspond ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment next to the battery To access the fuses press the release tabs and remove the cover 072710794 A Front Distribution Unit 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F01 60 Amp Blue i Body Controller F02 20 Amp Yellow Audio Amplifier F03 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Switch F04 40 Amp Orange Anti Lock Brake Pump F05 70 Amp Tan Electric Power Steering F06 20 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan Single Speed F06 30 Amp Green Radiator Fan Low Speed F07 40 A
3. 1 INTRODUCTION 2 5 3 0 5 05 dra ds pa RICE B ach E aE RE Pepe a d a e do SS ER Pe 4g 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee I nn 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee m n nn 83 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee e crt 135 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 43 a RR EG Eo be e ec a a REOR d ORG PS Nea ae aes 223 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 4 9 a ade ad a Rea ace ce de EUR ICA a CRURA RECAP 305 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ss 4 3 a omg e id ox e eda Es REGE Pod Se REPE e 345 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES pie cone temale Maata Be i ood BE eee ADAC NL RU ey ACRES RR RIAL ACA ORC a 405 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eee e 9 eh 413 En INDEX oa da is aa ia sae gen meade ai ade ae ak oa 423 Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 H VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 7 E HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 5 H VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 7 4 INTRODUCTION In INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle Be as sured that it represents precision workmanship distinc tive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenan
4. 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Door Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar open and not fully closed e Driver s Door Open e Passenger Door Open e Driver and Passenger Door Open co GD ey UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Liftgate Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Liftgate Open Warning Light Gum This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open Transmission Fault Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Transmission Fault Warning Light This light will illuminate together with a message in the EVIC and a buzzer to indicate a transmission fault Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Hood Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Hood Open Warning Light acd This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar open and not fully closed Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure i is lower than the recommended value and or that slow pressure loss is occurring In these gt cases Optimal tire dur
5. 177 A kar actos Guat tee oS a ew e EUN 181 New Trip 4 5 Re cross RE as 181 Start Of Trip Procedure 181 Trip Computer ose rae raras 180 Trip FUNCHONS isse Rer x ees 182 Emergency In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher 307 Jacking sicco e RI Rh 320 JUMP Starting ck id 333 TOWING koss ia goce Ee aan dia 340 Emission Control System Maintenance Engine Air Cleaner e 357 Break In Recommendations 76 Checking Oil Level iere Ree paksus 353 Compartment re cce zs e E Ee E 347 348 Cooling sid cra e aree erra E E 369 Exhaust Gas Caution 78 300 Fais ToStart zc ia Rex Ra 229 Flooded Starting oooooooommmooo eee 229 Fuel Requirements 0 296 401 Ql coso s sep ed dane x oh eed a 353 400 Oil Filler Cap ccna aws enn 355 356 Oil Filter sss arog Ae ae ae ee o bee 373 357 Oil Selection 00000005 354 355 401 Oil Synthetie igs eed noted rine ens de 356 Overheating x cues eese Fuse mas 307 OLALUNB o aces ea ese des e RO e RR CR Re D doa 227 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 52 342 Ethan ote rrt d EE ERN E 297 NI 429 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Flid Type dide rent RR are creas 377 Event Data Recorder 00 56 Exhaust Gas Caution 78 300 Exhaust System 2 0 0 0 000000 ooo 78 366 Exterior Lights ee re ae nex anres 81 395
6. 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Control Buttons Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the EVIC Push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to return to the main screen Push and release the UP button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value Push and release the DOWN V button to scroll down ward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed NOTE UP A and DOWN V buttons activate differ ent functions according to the following situations To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards To increase or decrease values during settings NOTE When opening one of the front doors the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers covered for versions markets where provided for a few seconds Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Setup Menu The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a cycle Push and release the UP AN and DOWN V but tons to access the different options and settings setup The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU button A single push on the UP Aor DOWN V but tons will scroll through the setup menu options The menu includes the following functions e Dimmer e Speed Beep if Equipped e Trip B Data A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 LJ e e e e Audio Repetition Navigation
7. CONTENTS H SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Puerto Rico And U S Virgin Islands 417 TOUR VENICE as d gentiaan as eis sla Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Prepare For The Appointment 415 Impaired TDD TTY 0 0 417 Prepare A List 4 cs zai gea cede deos 415 Service Contract llle 417 Be Reasonable With Requests 415 M WARRANTY INFORMATION 418 E IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 415 M REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 419 FIAT Customer Center 0 416 In The 50 United States And O FIAT Canada Customer Center 416 UAE OEE pe SEN aA ANE dd In Mexico Contact llle lesen 416 E ate E PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 419 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HI ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades 00 421 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 421 Treadweat xem khm poeta vr SEE 421 Temperature Grades 422 a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often p
8. 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection WARNING Continued The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme varies considerably Only high quality filters should be diately with large amounts of water Refer to used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom Emergencies for further information mended Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep Maintenance Free Battery flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 CAUTION test Drive belt tension shoul
9. with Automatic Transmission es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 Engine Oil 1 4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 1 4L Turbo Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 12991 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Spark Plugs 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended 87 Octane Acceptable 0 15 Ethanol CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant
10. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and the Low inflation pressure left or right front rear tire message will still turn ON due to the low tire However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message will be displayed e This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message will be displayed Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium TPM System With TFT Tire Pressure Display Screen The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mou
11. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the Mainte nance Schedules section for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
12. Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ibs Occupant 3 160 lbs 865 los hus Fero 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Ocgupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e e e Safety and Vehicle Stability Economy Tread Wear Ride Comfort Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly re
13. When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will sound a chime and also display a Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message in the EVIC for approxi mately 5 seconds 10 37 am 05 31 2012 service tire pressure monitoring system 19345 mi 87 F 055874194 Service TPM System Message If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message will no longer display A STARTING AND OPERATING 295 A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 4 5 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next
14. rear seating position located on the back of the Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt 4 to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 1 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle 5 anchorages 2 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selec
15. 32 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 36 Pregnant Women o oooooooooo oo tega tah 38 Seat Belt Extender 37 Seat Belt Pretensioner 38 Seat Belt Reminder o ooooooo o 30 Seat Belt System o o oooo ooo ooo ooo isra 28 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 386 Seat Belt Reminder 0 30 SeatBelts 0 30 79 Child Restraint o o 57 Extender isa a ae tas dca pa 37 Front Seat o ooooooooo oo 30 32 34 INSpeCHON kr s Re ee eR Gas viia 79 Operating Instructions 0 34 Pregnant Women sss eses m Rn 38 Pretensioners llle 38 Rear Seat esae eran AE EE NE RS RU 32 Reminders decedat i ted e o dente 150 Untwisting Procedure 36 SEALS iaa ade krss 93 Adjustment 3 uu eb Sins Bat ns eh Ree Boney ere 93 Heated cp eas eed e E Rea 97 Security Alarm Disarm The System ska REA o 16 Security AlATM iue never eR PEERS ES 16 Sentry Key Immobilizer 14 Service Assistance llle ess 415 Service Contfact iss up RI a d eR ER ES 417 Service Manuals 419 Shift Lever Override lessen 339 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 232 ShoulderBelts 0 32 Signals Turn es oma naa emen 81 106 173 Snow Chains Tire Chains lessen 285 SHOW
16. 5222 114 Blash Io Pass 4 2 enixe cta E Res 105 TO ACHVale os dre Rat osi VOR ONE vx 115 Parking Lighis 2 re kbps 105 To Set A Desired Speed 115 Daytime Running Lights 106 To Deactivate cisco etri Re 116 TumSignals sees 106 To Resume Speed asaca gna sarianu nua i 116 Lane Change Assist eser ae eo ae 107 To Vary The Speed Setting 116 Follow Me Home Headlight Delay 107 To Accelerate For Passing 117 Interior LightS ooooooooooo ooo 107 M REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED 118 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 108 Rear Park Assist Sensors 118 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Rear Park Assist Warning Display 119 Emergency Operation lt lt lt ss sessast at eass 127 Rear Park Assist Display 119 Sun Shade If Equipped 127 Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts 120 M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Failure Indications 122 M CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System 122 E CUPHOLDERS a R a P ik aa 130 Park Assist System Usage Precautions 123 MM STORAGE 15441 dabas 132 ll POWER SUNROOF IF EOUIPPED 125 Glove Compartment 132 To Opens 494g ed hauad ies ae 126 M CARGO AREA FEATURES 5
17. If Equipped We recommend you use Berulub FR 43 Information Provided by DEALER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 406 Maintenance Chart 408 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Re quired message is displayed Severe Operating Condi tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no ci
18. Introducing Uconnect 00 202 Get Started ues oor ky iy SERERE 202 Basic Voice Commands 204 Radio gae a a 205 Media esta sta Pei aoe sea sian saa 206 Voice Text Reply iode codeine at oe s 207 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 207 Harmful Interference Statement 208 Additional Information 208 ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 209 Radio Operation 210 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 210 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137 E CLIMATE CONTROLS 210 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 213 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 211 Operating Tips 0 219 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Side Vent 2 Multifunction Lever Light Control 3 Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 4 Windshield Wiper Washer Trip Computer 5 Central Air Vents 6 Storage Compartment Radio 7 Passenger Air Bag 8 Glove Compartment 9 Rear Defrost Button 10 Hazard Button 11 Climate Controls 12 Power Windows Control 040140268 13 Storage Compartment 14 Shift Lever 15 Sport Button 16 Horn Driver Airbag UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0403076446 Instrument Cluster 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IN
19. WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selec tor Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Press the brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 228 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Turn the ignition switch to the AVV ACC START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait 10 to
20. _ 236 FIAT 500 500c_ OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured Copyright 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
21. cates that 1 1 3 gallons of fuel are left in the tank in this situation refuel as soon as possible e Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge This gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at Turbo Gauge This gauge shows the current turbo usage e ECO Index Gauge The ECO Index gauge allows the driver to monitor their driving style in order to increase fuel economy The efficiency of the driving style is displayed on a gauge located on the right side of the instrument cluster and ranges from a minimum value of 0 up to a maximum value of 5 0 low 5 high A higher ECO index indicates a more fuel efficient drive style and will increase your fuel economy A lower ECO index indicates frequent accelerations decelerations and will decrease your fuel economy The index is recalculated approximately Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty any gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic converter ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 every second and takes into account a combination of the instant fuel economy and your driving style dur ing the current trip NOTE Different trips may have different values even if the same driving style is maintained Some factors that may impact the calculated index value are e Traffic conditions e Trip duration Temperature engine and ambient 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0403076448 Base Instrument C
22. oo iwi Life Of Tires a otata asd rikast Saata Jacking Instructions s 329 Liftgate Sedan xx cse oh ee x Rr Jack Location s sesso sym eoe Ped ER Rr ee 321 LightBulbs rmt PER baa As Jack Operati n s xac ee dor es 920 325 LightS i vue are Gin bee Rea nea ea Jump Starting 25d dace ee a ee eer s 333 Ait Bag esie e Pee e D Rea ress Brake Assist Warning 0 Key Fob Brake Warning esee eR RE ERR oO Disarm The Alarm llle ess 16 Bulb Replacement llle Key In Reminder rsre ee 14 Cr ise Pr Key Replacement llli 15 Engine Temperature Warning KO a a a N E A 11 13313510 viso abe E Key Sentry Immobilizer o o oo o oooo o 14 FOB fg ee m Xn exea 9 UR o meg Re ek ii High Beats er eR eem es Lane Change ASSiSt o o o o o o oo ooo o 107 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine Lap Shoulder BeltS o o o o oo oooooo 32 Darle e a e eds Du E A TE Latches cue e Be a o 81 PASSING inver erede deg Sea AA eR Beant ia 102 Seat Belt Reminder 00 432 INDEX IN SOLVIGES ii owe SSE ee CRS x dones 396 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 160 Traction Control 1 5235 x 3469 aneaae bide hades 260 TUM SIENA gt va dbo Ko dae a ep athe we 81 106 173 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 157 173 Loading Vehicle TIES 144424 4 50448 PEG 842 am SS 268 Locks Automatic
23. 1 4L En gine Replace spark plugs 1 4L Turbo X X X X X Engine 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN i i o o o o o o Mileage or time passed esisisisisg 2 2 2 S S S S s S whichever comes first 29 S e e e e oe e slelelslsl s o o o e e e e e e Q ce d CO N e lt ive o N 0 o T Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o lololo 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 818188283 58 5151315 5 55 N co st e e e a or Rz 2 2 8ISI a amp Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150 000 X X miles 240 000 km whichever comes first Inspect and replace PCV valve if X necessary Replace the timing belt X The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident Information Provided by DEALER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
24. Filters Air Cleaner meeste Dea do d TRE s 357 Air Conditioning 360 Engine Fuel 22a cave pena heard ense nea 401 Engine Oll sive ae eee e mes 357 Engine Oil Disposal 04 356 Flashers Tum Signal 422 eR Rn tea 81 173 Flooded Engine Starting oooooooooo oo 229 Fluid Brake ee es 403 Fluid Capacities cocos eme a 400 Fluid L aks oae RR e dedu he 81 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 378 A 24 Nori See eo ead 401 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 401 Fog Lights eve Seda RES 108 167 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 337 E els ens sae a ba St 296 Addihg icon cee reed eee eased p e eae 301 Additives s diu a I RE PSS ate ee X 298 Capacity iau esos Mone ses lee ae 400 Clean ATF 124 544 ni 9a exceso Ry ea he ee hae EA 297 Ethanol 22a m cad ae eh oa G EX G n 297 Filler Cap Gas Cap v sas aiot duiae aaie eee 301 Gasoline iiis sua or ee a 296 Materials Added 00 298 Methan l 1 5 54 abs eR e eee CR 297 Requirements ss kosmoss neo Ren RR RR a 296 Specifications ics ated Cim bera E ee Ed 401 Tank Capacity ee sedere dp de ge id 400 Fuel oca aeaa Eds aha a Gla Pate ts 301 USOS sm nnis eese as A S mene E Meare e eet 388 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 301 302 Gasoline Clean Air 297 Gasoline Fuel 0 296 400
25. ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II Cybersecurity Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system OBD II and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls Authorized service technicians may need to 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICL
26. Screen Uconnect 5 0 VR A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear Subscrip tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required Push the VR button t amp v After the beep say Tune to ninety five point five FM Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP At any time if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command push the VR button Ww and say Help The system will provide you with a list of commands 10 10 ks 89 9 101 9 94 7 1033 All FM PI SD gt AM SXM Tune Info Audio 0101073169 Uconnect 5 0 Radio 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Media TIP Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or USB device Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist album song and genre information is displayed Uconnect offers connections via USB Bluetooth and Auxiliary ports If Equipped Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices Push the VR button w After the beep say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to Browse by switch your media source or choose an artist Now Playin e Change source to Bluetooth ying Change source to iPod e Artists e Change source to USB O Albums e Play artist Beethoven Play album Greatest Hits Play X i Genres M song M
27. can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 418 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in
28. capacity other than what was originally equipped clearance Follow these recommendations to guard on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load against damage index could result in tire overloading and failure Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as You could lose control and have a collision recommended by the traction device manufacturer e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having EE adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire Install on Front Tires failure and loss of vehicle control Due to limited clearance a 185 55R15 tire with a Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile CAUTION traction device or equivalent is recommended WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision 286 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before
29. do not tighten the bolts fully do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle until the vehicle has been lowered has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left result in serious injury WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp l6 edges To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 9 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until 11 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Have each bolt has been tightened twice For the correct the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible wheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your autho rized dealership or service station A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have 10 Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi bag Stow it under the driver s seat and secure the ately bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle 12 Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required WA
30. heating elements off NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Reactive Head Restraints
31. or to deactivate Off the navigation system info displaying proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP or Down button to highlight Naviga tion Repetition and push and release the MENU button 2 Push and release the UP or DOWN button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Speed Display When this function is activated the cluster will display the vehicle speed MPH or km h To activate On or to deactivate Off the speed display feature proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP ZXor DOWN V button to highlight Speed Display Push and release the MENU button to enter the Speed Display MENU Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button to select display deactivation Off MPH or km h Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen Buzzer Volume Adjusting The Failure Warning Buzzer Volume With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany ing any failure warning indication can be adjusted to Low Medium High and OFF To adjust the volume proceed as follows 1 3 Brie
32. take your vehicle to a competent me chanic a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo maintenance schedule there are other components which nents as the chemicals can damage your engine may require servicing or replacement in the future transmission or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could procedure result in more costly repairs damage to other Engine Oil components or negatively impact vehicle perfor Checking Oil Level mance Immediately have potential malfunctions i M AA examined by an authorized dealer or qualified To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must repair center be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to Continued Check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes 354 MAI
33. talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance e f an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FIAT Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 1 888 242 6342 FIAT Canada Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 1 800 465 2001 English Phone 1 800 387 9983 French In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D E In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 Puerto Rico And U S Virgin Islands Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC P O Box 191857 San Juan 00919 1857 Tel 787 782 5757 Fax 787 782 3345 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States
34. with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e e e e e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have a
35. x A igh ig imm E i sot ARNG PUUD AND B Ko AIRBAG VIT TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL on Teme TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM EKR amp mm ons A ad tn t 204 bh Raa oO ELECTRONIC 010533317 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision bodily injury and or death It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owner s Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warn ings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B Pillar on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death gt 010862580 Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE
36. 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than 22 F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used An externally powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer The message plug in engine heater will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start CAUTION Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to pre vent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions Extended Park Starting NOTE Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days 1 Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle 2 Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 229 3 If the engine fails to start within ten seconds cycle the ignition to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool then repeat the Extended Park Starti
37. 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 276 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of you
38. 276 Radio Frequency General Information 15 21 Radio Operation llle 210 Rear Liftgate Sedan 000 27 Rear Window Features 133 Recorder Event Data 0 56 Recreational Towing 04 303 Reformulated Gasoline 297 Refrigerant oogun epe E I aer ao ae ea 360 Release Hood 0 102 Reminder Seat Belt 30 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Disarm The Alarm 16 Power Convertible Top Function Remote Sound System Radio Controls 209 Replacement Bulbs 0 395 Replacement Keys 29e do inpia 15 Replacement Parts 0 352 Replacement Tires llle 283 Reporting Safety Defects 419 Restraints Child 5 22 0020480448 s 57 Restraints Occupant oasa sse eese 28 Rotation Tires uicem eo t u ARA 286 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 79 Safety Checks Outside Vehide 81 Safety Defects Reporting llle 419 Safety Exhaust Gas liliis 78 Safety Information Tire 0 261 Sale VIPS of agente tad Ne pissed dart gs 77 Schedule Maintenance 00 406 Seat Belt Energy Management Feature 39 en INDEX 435 Lap Shoulder Belt Operation 34 Lap Shoulder Belts
39. 5 n Rn 132 ihren ETT 120 BM REAR WINDOW FEATURES 133 Pinch Protect Feature 126 Rear Window Defroster 133 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top the power convertible top switch is located on the overhead console The switch contains two buttons The passenger side button is used to open the power top and the driver side button is used to close the pou top Power Convertible Top Switch NOTE The power top buttons will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC ON RUN position The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob Refer to Opening Power Top Remote Function in Things To Know Before Starting for more infor mation Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second for the three quarter open spoiler position Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top Manual Open For manual open push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 NOTE Vertical movement only operates in auto open close mode Raising The Power Top Auto Close From the convertible top fully open position push the top close button for approximately one seco
40. 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 4 8 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn off the Tire Service Kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel 316
41. Air Bag Light ere RR cae s 54 79 149 Air Bag Maintenance 6 0 0 55 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 357 Air Conditioner Maintenance 359 Aib Conditioning 3 ace sn recep RAO Seal d s 211 Air Conditioning Controls 211 Air Conditioning Filter sees cea canst seanss 360 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 219 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 359 360 Air Conditioning System 211 213 359 Air Pressure Tires 0 274 Alarm Disarm The System 0 2 0 0000200000 16 Vehicle Security Alarm 0 2 2 0 000 005 16 Alarm Security Alarm 0 16 Alterations Modifications Vehide 8 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 370 400 Capacities 4 ae si c qa he ene te Re een dd 400 Disposal see inae se eed ope gems 373 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 252 Anti Lock Warning Light 170 171 Appearance Care ae gad alae han RR Keane s 379 II 425 Audio Systems Radio 0 191 Automatic Dimming Mirror e 90 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 406 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 213 Automatic Transaxle o oo o o ooo oooooooo 12 Automatic Transmission 233 377 379 Adding Fluid zero n 378 379 Fluid And Filter Changes sisse 379 Fluid Change isis e m ER e 37
42. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes Contact between the front passen ger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be re moved Yes Yes all may be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re tractor Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the r
43. CAUTION Direct contact of air fresheners insect repellents suntan lotions or hand sanitizers to the plastic painted or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage Wipe away immediately CAUTION Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 CAUTION Continued equipped with radio antennas Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the eleme
44. CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 11 H REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF inition Key Retndvill essa 12 EQUIPPED 45 52 sey 280402 a he Pla eae n 16 Locking Doors With AKey 14 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 17 Ke gion Reminder isses pug WM SENTRY KEY e meene 14 Openiha Bowers Top Remdte ml ees 0 18 RSPAS dui pecu a Mania 18 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 19 General Information 15 Programming Additional Transmitters 19 M VE MCLE SECURIT ALARM rai 16 Transmitter Battery Replacement 19 a OE eese ya EE 10 General Information 21 To Disarm The System os sesse tasr resau 16 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH B DOOR LOCKS 00000000004 22 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 41 Power Door Locks If Equipped 24 Child Restraints e 57 Auto Door Locks 25 Transporting Pets 76 E POWER WINDOWS 5 43 sta 25 M ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 76 Power Window Switches 25 NM SAFETY TIPS 5 62344 RE n ORE doi ines 77 Auto DOWI so cde E Led ERE awe ER RR 26 Transporting Passengets 77 Wind Buffeting 27 Exhaust Gasiegis tile eee ES nu oht 78 B LIFTGATE 624544365 4
45. Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment Washing Hand washing is highly recommended Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material If you must use an automatic car wash soft cloth systems are preferred CAUTION Avoid high pressure car washes as they can damage the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun Wet the entire vehicle 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN before washing the top The top should be washed with the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to re a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap move stubborn stains If stains persist contact your local solution such as liquid dishwashing soap Do not use authorized dealer for further suggestions detergent CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol FUSES WARNING When replacing a blown fuse always use an appro priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage a
46. Gasoline Reformulated 0 297 Gear Ranges osse bts ethane oe low a es 236 Gear Select Lever Override 339 General Information 04 296 General Maintenance 04 353 Glass Cleaning 5559 esca ti ia e tees pi 384 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Standing Walei ssis eisein eee 244 Headlights 2 eed neh aie E E ees 104 Cleaning c venis aa eee ck aes he ea 384 PASSING comia seid atasa eae de a 105 SWIN 2 3 uon ta bond dni owns ame x hee nas 105 Heated Mirrors llle 93 Heated Seats llle 97 Heat ora Saeed cae Sak OES a 211 Hill Start Assist ous Be ea led Bee ees 255 Holder CUP iere titer tena titans as 130 Hood Release o o ooooooooooo o ooo 102 ISO ai a rare te a dn ds e 12 KEY scie uds os asd egi ee qus 11 12 Ignition Key Removal lille 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key ee 14 Information Center Vehicle 177 Instrument Cluster 00 157 173 Instrument Cluster 0 139 142 Instrument Panel And Controls 138 Instrument Panel Cover 0 00000 ene 385 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 385 Interior Appearance Care e 383 en INDEX 431 Interior Lighting i ees oS teoste Re 107 Lead Free Gasoline oo ooocooooo o o Irittoduction vos ga a REOR ar tr ae ee 4 Leaks Fluid
47. MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045670103 Manual Temperature Control MTC The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials and one inner push knob UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 1 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 2 Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the 0 OFF position There are four blower speeds 3 Recirculation Control Rotate this control to change the system between recir culation mode and outside air mode Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present 212 UNDERSTAN
48. Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn The correspond ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to indicate the operation of the turn signal 031410254 Turn Signal Operation NOTE The indicators will automatically turn off when the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned to a straight position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Follow Me Home Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK position and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel within two minutes Each time the lever is pulled the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds Interior Lights The interior light switches are located in the overhead console The interior lights can be set to three different positions Off Left Position Center Position On Right Position Using the switch on the left overhead push the switch to the
49. Repetition If Equipped Speed Display Comfort Version Only Buzzer Volume GSI Shift manual transmission only e Exit Menu Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button to select 2 3 the main menu option to set Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button by single pushes to select the new setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub menu 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the first submenu option 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button by single pushes to scroll through all the submenu options 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the displayed submenu option and to open the rel evant setup menu 4 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button by single pushes to select the new setting for this submenu option 5 Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected submenu option 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE 6 Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu short hold or the main screen longer hold Change Engine Oil Indicator System Change Engine Oil Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Engine Oil message will display in the EVIC display
50. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Customer Action Customer Will See Customer Action Customer Will See 1 Turn Ignition OFF Turn Signal Switch Must Be Placed In Neutral State 2 Turn Ignition ON Left Turn Light Is OFF Right Turn Light BLINKS 6 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light Is ON SOLID Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID 7 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF Turn Signal Switch Must Be Placed In Neutral State Left Turn light Is OFF Right Turn Light is OFF 3 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 4 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON 5 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light Is ON SOLID Right Turn Signal Light BLINKS Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 8 Turn Ignition OFF 9 Turn Hazard Flashers OFF Manually System is now reset and the engine may be started If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Occupant Restraint Control o ler ORC monitors the internal circuits and N interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical component
51. Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of position your authorized dealer can provide you with a the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used e Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can only if the existing seat belt is not long enough When the increase the risk of serious injury or death in a Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu collision Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the pant it must be removed lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 0226075266 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
52. To Remember 372 373 Pressure Cap os ase adi hse pedem ea 372 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 370 Corrosion Protection 379 Cruise Light 4 mwgu Pad ce khe 174 176 Cupholders 5c Emme EXER LA 130 Customer Assistance o oooooococooo ooo 415 Customer Programmable Features Data Recorder Event 00 56 Daytime Running Lights 106 Dealer Service o ooo 352 Defroster Windshield 79 212 213 Diagnostic System Onboard 349 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 378 Disarming Security System 0 16 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 373 DootAj f iecore eae ea aes 158 159 Door Ajar Light ccs 0 0 0 0 00008 158 159 Door Locks aaa PR che AR aces Door Locks Automatic 0 Downshifting s s sieu kaapin a eee Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Standing Waters salaja a cosses es mamma ae 428 INDEX IN Electrical Power Outlets 128 Electric Remote Mirrors 0 91 Electronic Brake Control System 252 Brake Assist System o ooo oooococoomo 254 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 114 Electronic Stability Control ESC 256 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 155 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
53. USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB or AUX port located in the center console 0440043698 USB AUX Port 1 Auxiliary Cable Jack 2 USB Connector 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the customer programmable features Many features can vary by vehicle 0440079672 Uconnect 5 0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the faceplate are located below and beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings ie 30 60 90 push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and back arrow buttons on the faceplate Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen Push the Display Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on Push the Back Arrow b
54. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h WARNING Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you permanent damage to the kit a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 E After Driving If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn on Tire
55. and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Balance When in this display you may adjust the Balance settings e Auto On Radio The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off To make your selection push the Settings button then Audio then Auto On Radio Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Paired Phones This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Tune Start Tune Start begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets so you can enjoy the complete song This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song Tune Start works in the back ground so you will not even realize it s on except that you will miss the experienc
56. and or right rear region the display will show solid arcs in the left and or right rear region and will produce an audible alert As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE HH Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission is placed into REVERSE an audible alert is activated The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the dis tance from the obstacle Pulses emitted in quick succes sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in 30 cm away KE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION Obstacle An obstacle is present within the Audible signal dashboard loudspeaker Distance sensors field of view e Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases Emits continuous tone at 12 in 30 cm e Adjustable volume level Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Visual signal EVIC e Arcs are shown based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the ve
57. checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open conta
58. clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
59. clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the wheel liner Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp assembly 073310795 Tail Lamp Assembly Screws A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 3 Remove four screws and separate the backplate from Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL the lamp housing 4 Remove the tail stop or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter clockwise 2 5 Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out 3 6 Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp 4 5 6 7 1 Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly Disconnect the electric connector Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder Remove the snap fitted bulb to be replaced and re place it Close the back cap locking it properly Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the guard caps 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 10 5 Gallons 40 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters Cooling System 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine MOPAR 4 6 Quarts 4 4 Liters Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula with Manual Transmission 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine MOPAR 5 8 Quarts 5 5 Liters Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula
60. d eo des iae 77 Child Restraint ose corrida Res 57 Child Restraints Booster SEALS secu d eio ae cap POR a ea E qe 62 Child Restraints esec e aa ci ek 57 Child Seat Installation o oo o 73 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 70 Infants And Child Restraints Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint 69 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat BOLE soutient dt on een Sane a ee 71 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 64 Older Children And Child Restraints 60 beating Positi hS sues aan omma ead 63 Clean Air Gasoline 297 Cleaning Wheels 23 45 08 445 8 ees ROLE ps 382 Windshield Wiper Blades 363 Climate Control 29d ead ee ca bk Gee Y Ys 210 Clutches n ty die od See es Se RACER EA UE Ea 375 Clutch Fluide ase date RR Ee E E 375 Compact Spare Tir8 oooooooooommmooo ooo 280 Connector DIG vec Boe era te i A Pd eed e 191 Universal Consumer Interface UCI a INDEX 427 Contract Service 4 064 aa denm a 417 Convertible Top Maintenance 386 Coolant Antifreeze 400 401 Cooling System a ica a a OR Reis 369 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 371 Coolant Capacity 6 aeara eee 401 Coolant Level 369 373 Disposal Of Used Coolant 373 Drain Flush And Refill 369 INSPECHON uo eheu od Cha nes 373 Points
61. defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner near the front windshield The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors Sun Visor Passenger Side Shown SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Adjusting Bar Forward Rearward Adjustment While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the desired position is reached Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may b
62. e The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indi cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher tem perature when driving in hot weather or up moun tain grades It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE 3 Speedometer 5 Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge Turbo Gauge ECO In e Indicates vehicle speed dex Gauge Depending on what options and trim level your vehicle 4 Fuel Gauge i E A is eguipped with there are three gauges available The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the tank The switching on of the digital warning light indi
63. emissions and im prove air quality The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended Prop erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as ethanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso line containing more than 1576 ethanol E 15 Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15 ethanol E 15 Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15 ethanol E 15 or gasoline containing methanol 298 STARTING AND OPERATING HN are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing up to 15 ethanol E 15 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim ited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine
64. for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily push and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster It features a driver interactive display displays informa tion such as trip information range fuel consumption average speed and travel time a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Trip Button The TRIP button located on the right steering column stalk can be used to display and to reset the previously described values e A short button push displays the different values A long button push resets the system and
65. for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de signed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job
66. further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Continued CAUTION Continued Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern
67. gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass Ka KI 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up ward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 4 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder Wav 072607742 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not engi
68. gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic eguipment to determine if the problem could recur 242 STARTING AND OPERATING HN If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position beside the Drive position it can be moved forward and rear ward This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever forward triggers a downshift and rearward an upshift The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward or forward except as described below The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engi
69. gear selector Brake Warning Ligh i ith th Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or H the Brake anung DIERE retains Od with ue in a location accessible to children A child could parking brake released a belle cystem malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle authorized dealer immediately e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued 250 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE Manual Transmission If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal to engine response This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering 1 To activate the Sport mode push the SPORT button SPORT Button Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Momentarily release the accelerator pedal 3 Press the accelerator pedal again to activate STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Automatic Transmission If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmis sion shift schedules for more aggressive shifting This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spi
70. ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a low pressure message and a tire highlighted in a different color After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a Service TPM System message For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a Service Tire Pres sure Monitoring System message Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it the TPMS will update automatically In addi tion the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 296 STARTING AND OPERATING turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including
71. inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts pretensioners and Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental Side Air Bags 1 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs Located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats E 0226008351 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts in ad
72. is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti vating BeltAlert 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with out board front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and
73. it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES SS wm A Jack Warning Label NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of the Tires General Information under Starting And Oper ating for information about the spare tire it s use and operation CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver s seat 2 Remove center cap Center Cap Removal NOTE Before using the swivel wrench to remove the wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into the notched part of the center cap 061674018 E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is secu
74. lever upward The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers but at half the frequency When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE 031570084 Rear Wiper Operation NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control lever is located on the left side of the steering column below the turn signal controls UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Fai
75. maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con ditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 WARNING Continued The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary WARNING Pumping the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could je
76. occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 294 kg since 5 x 150 lbs 68 kg 750 lbs 340 kg and 1400 Ibs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 Ibs 294 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 A STARTING AND OPERATING 271 NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 272 STARTING AND OPERATING HN
77. of cargo the pump brake fully applied The parking brake should al will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been Ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger especially on an incline Although the pump is rubber mounted for quiet opera tion it is normal to hear it running during this time Shift Lever Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal NOTE To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL lift the ring under the knob and at the same time move the gearshift lever to the right and then backward STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear When selecting REVERSE gear the driver should pause ap proximately 2 seconds after pushing in the cl
78. or In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you until the ignition key is turned off must follow the system reset procedure Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as EAR E Customer Action Customer Will See the battery has power or until the ignition key is 1 Turn ignition OFF PEOVER Turn Signal Switch Must Unlock the doors automatically be placed in Neutral After the event occurs when the system is active the Sub message Fuel Cutoff See Handbook is displayed 2 Tarn ignition ON Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine BLINKS Ms dci jx a es ground Pa E engine on 3 Tum Right Turn Signal Right Turn Light is ON 1000007 T LE E Switch ON SOLID Left Turn Light starting the engine BLINKS System Reset Procedure 4 Turn Left Turn Signal Left Turn Light is ON After an impact causing airbag deployment the left and Switch ON SOLID Right Turn Light right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel BLINKS cluster will both be blinking until the ignition is turned off 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 5 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 6 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light is ON SOLID 7 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutra
79. out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth imme diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit A Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and place the ignition in the OFF position 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and in
80. preserve your battery NOTE When the vehicle has not been started or driven e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery for at least 30 days an Extended Park Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle Refer to Starting Proce dures in Starting And Operating for further informa tion e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Overhead Lamp Bulb Number C5W Courtesy Lamp W5W Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL Front Parking Daytime Running Lamps W21 5W Front Fog Lamps HILL Front Side Marker Lamps W3W Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W Side Direction Lamps WY5W Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Bulb Number Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Rear Tail and Stop Lamps P21 5W Rear Backup Lamps W16W W5W License Plate Lamps NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer LED See Authorized dealer BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condens
81. seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING Continued Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it only used to install rear facing or forward facing to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking a i child restraints that have a harness for restraining Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency the child locking mode Supplemental Restraint System SRS WARNING e The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea ture or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the proce Occupant Restraint Controller ORC dures in the Service Manual Air Bag Warning Light e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Steering Wheel and Column e Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats The locked mode is Knee Impact Bolsters e Advanced Front Air Bags Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Instrument Panel Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e Supplemental Side Air Bags e Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt B
82. seating position 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap in any direction proved tether anchorages in your vehicle Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage oK OK 0226047162 WARNING Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and betwee
83. tes 2a iced ed aatal led vl 278 Spare Tite aui aa 279 280 281 436 INDEX IN Spark Plugs 53 amd x er x me rete 401 Speed Control Accel Decel aureae adora 117 Speed Control Cruise Control 114 Sport Mode 1 cio SX doen s at ed n 250 Starling iesus a e eb e Ra dea a ROC A 227 Automatic Transmission 0 227 Cold Weather s 228 Engine Fails To Start 0 229 Manual Transmission 227 Steering PoWel usos ne ENY Gnade 246 Tilt Col mn cssc RR rer e XR 113 Wheel Tilt isses RR 9e 113 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 209 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 209 Storage Storage Vehicles ases che ees 220 Stuck PIECING 3 eese Eget permet tede quid 337 Sun Roof essa eae ku ace e daw saan 125 Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag 42 Synthetic Engine Qil secs pedet BEDE 356 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 213 Tilt Steering Column isa cp ars t rx Rees 113 Tire And Loading Information Placard 268 269 Tire Markings oss e rne 261 TCS uus inier tex OR ev Rue iR UA s 81 273 279 421 Aging Life OfTires 0 283 Ait Pressufe 22 nasse eR EO Ge UR E 273 Chains 32 5364 seen bee eee p ga PERS 285 Changing due ege ee RE Oen eta quens 320 Compact Spare s ee eee 280 General Information 273 279 HighSpeed aos esa Sx e e RU ies 276 Infl
84. the 2 Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage lower right of center console Perform the following the front retaining tab and remove the cover procedure to replace the filter Fe A 1 Remove the Torx screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover Console Closeout Panel 072670487 Torx Screw Location 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Remove the two 5 5 mm screws 1 and 2 that secure the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing SA N 072670493 A C Air Filter 5 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position Air Filter Cover Screw Locations indicators pointing in the same direction as removal 4 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing Take note of the air filter position indica tors ee a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 6 Install the passenger side console closeout Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray Whit
85. the air bag system immedi ately Continued 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II WARNING Continued not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circums
86. the four to eight second interval a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or Maintaining Your Air Bag System remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine as related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Modifications to any part of the air bag system Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition could cause it to fail when you need it You could the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec be injured if the air bag system is not there to system immediately wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position and stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service
87. the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET button 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the RES button once will result
88. the way and covers the window The e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains they are not belted and seated properly or if items are SABICs Do not stack luggage or other cargo up positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate Children high enough to block the deployment of the are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air SABICs The trim covering above the side win bag dows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstruc tions Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs In order for the SABICs to work as intended do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The SABICs and SABs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision The sid
89. those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washingion D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if i
90. vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 Tire Tread 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 1 6 mm When the tread is A STARTING AND OPERATING 283 worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressu
91. while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster CAUTION e Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continued 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION Continued The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Fail ure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Fail
92. will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 6 Front Defrost ov Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON Air comes from the windshield UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 and side window demist outlets When the defrost but ton is selected the blower level will increase Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting and defogging Per forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 7 Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 8 Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IN NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear 9 Bi Level Airis directed through the panel and floor outlets Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor mode button to enter Bi Level mode the indicators illuminate when ON Performi
93. with a clean damp towel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN
94. 274421 Key Fob Screw Location Mechanical Key Release Button 3 Take out the battery case Remove and replace the battery observing its polarity 021336637 Battery Case Removed 4 Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the screw to lock it into place THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle indicating locked when the door is closed the door will lock Driver s Door Lock Handle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 WARNING WARNING Continued others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch t
95. 35849 Liftgate Handle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode NOTE Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi tion However because the gas pressure drops with temperature it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use th
96. 44448 biee sae bees 27 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The E OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 28 Vehicle a earna E is S 79 Important Safety Precautions 28 Ean in kl bus E M Mni Seat Belt Systems o o o o o oo ooo ooo oooo 30 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE a dud to be duplicate vad sil aaa transmitter with an integrated key To use the mechanical rized den that so a you your new VENI nas the sey kev simpl hth haniai k 1 b code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can ey simply pusn the mechanical key release button be used to order duplicate keys 020274421 Mechanical Key Release Button 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Rotate the key to the OFF LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder 020236009 Ignition Switch Positions 1 STOP OFF LOCK 2 MAR ACC ON RUN 3 AVV START a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always shift the transmis sion into PARK apply the parking brake turn the engine OFE remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or wit
97. 79 Convertible Top Care If Equipped 386 B FUSES iui ruda kasse CAR n 388 Interior Fuses ooooooooooooooo 389 Underhood Fuses ein tas 391 B VEHICLE STORAGE 5 53a Ve ana sae 394 B REPLACEMENT BULBS i222 RR GE 395 W BULB REPLACEMENT 43mm n 396 Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 396 Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running L MPE s ek re RR Res eor Roe te 397 Front Fog Lamps s 398 Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 398 Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps 44 cia ee ee cede E aod PEE riu 398 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 399 B FLUID CAPACITIES 0 400 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARIS sms S56 RESP EE Y PEE 401 ENGINE iae eoe ad 401 Chassis cM p a PEERS E Sd d 403 a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L 074610803 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill 4 Front Distribution Unit Fuses 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 074664691 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Front Distribution Unit Fuses a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
98. 9 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 00000000000 378 Fluid Type s esee RR RBS RR dem 403 Gear Ranges vocacion 236 Special Additives iss seem 378 Autostick so 3 4 aio abo br e ia cM 242 Battery mesice aegea edo iteg dice voted 154 358 Charging System Light 154 Jump Starting ie doy eee da 333 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 19 Belts Seat Body Mechanism Lubrication B Pillar Locationie2 14224423 kala kira Brake Assist System Brake Fluid Brake Parking Brake e nim PS Roe Geos Pu ua eds Brake System lees Anti Lock ABS Master Cylinder Parking Warning Light Brake Transmission Interlock Bulb Replacement 004 Bulbs Light cssc IR RR Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant Capacities Fluids xs ses a med 426 INDEX IN Caps Filler Fuel eaa ra EUER qe ret nes ipe 301 Oil Engine seres 355 356 406 Carbon Monoxide Warning 78 300 Cargo Area Features 4 is e cae e ate 132 Car Washes ius det d du em Gaal She hate ae sas 380 Cellular Phone 0 0 mitia ei eee terime 210 Chains Tit 52s ke ssim Rede eds 285 Change Oil Indicator 2 0 0 0 0 002000 406 Changing A Flat Tire e 320 Chart Tire Sizitig a cem nbd emm a n 263 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 350 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 77 Checks Safety sueta esce des ed
99. AT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 307 M JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF VOR ENGINE OVEREBATS e up 0 BOUIPPED ue cin einem ae 320 E TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED 308 EL EE Tire Service Kit Storage 309 SPS TERNS Ph Garang eh area eo Preparations For Jacking Tire Service Kit Components And Operation 309 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 310 Ao cedet oxy ey Rat ie e Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 313 Road Tire Installation 331 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Spare lire Stowage esee e e ea 332 SPECIFICATIONS st ees e IAE RR 319 B JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 333 Torque Specifications 319 Preparations For Jump Start 334 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Jump Starting Procedure 336 Automatic Transmission 341 E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 337 Manual Transmission 342 M SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 339 M ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM 342 ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 340 a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the swit
100. Air Bags occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e Side Air Bags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed e Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions Side Air Bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding alon
101. B AUTOSTICK oooooocococoommo o 242 W BRAKE SYSTEM 0 252 Operation coria oes PY wes 242 M ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 252 ll DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 243 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 252 Acceleration e 243 Brake Assist System BAS 254 TractiON 1 224393 er RERO bia eae 244 Traction Control System TCS 254 ll DRIVING THROUGH WATER 244 Hill Start Assist HSA 255 Flowing Rising Water 245 Electronic Stability Control ESC 256 Shallow Standing Water 245 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And M POWER STEERING 222 22 246 ESC OFF Indicator Light 260 E PARKING BRAKE sss 248 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 261 SPORT MODE raros 250 xc M da E Manual Transmission If Equipped 250 Tire Identification Number TIN 265 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 251 Tire Terminology And Definitions 266 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 268 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 225 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 273 M TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 286 Tire Pressure 40454 canes eet e 273 M TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Tire Inflati
102. Can the rear facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the back of the front passenger seat front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more in formation Can the head restraints be removed Yes Yes all may be removed Locating LATCH Anchorages s The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion 0226074888 LATCH Anchorages 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Locating Tether Anchorages LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH WARNING This vehicle does not have a center seating position E There are tether strap anchorages behind each
103. Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then you should have the battery and charging system in start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged spected at your authorized dealer battery 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables CAUHON in the reverse sequence Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets Disconnecting The Jumper Cables draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular devices etc Eventually if 1 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the i i i plugged in long enough without engine operation engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to battery degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from 2 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable Starting from the negative post of the booster battery FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 3 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the 4 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable steering wheel rig
104. Continued A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 ux a eS e Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch 4 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low plate into the buckle until you hear a click across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision y Positioning The Lap Belt Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal if any slack
105. Control Engaged Indicator Light What It Means This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Blue Telltale Indicator Light High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light SS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control BD lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on flash to pass scenario 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS White Telltale Indicator Light Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light White Telltale Light Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON What It Means ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 0409043146 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 The EVIC consists of the following e System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
106. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Se lect the outside air position for maximum defogging Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost The A C can be deselected manually without dis turbing the mode control selection 4 Mode Control Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Defrost e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow y NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets e Floor e Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets o Mix w Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ugh window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois ture on the windshield e Defrost W Air is directed through the
107. Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose Clear 3 Pressure Gauge 7 Air Pump Hose Black Tire Service Kit Location 4 Power Button 8 Power Plug located on the bot tom side of the Tire Service Kit 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode 4 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode Selecting Sealant Mode E Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the Tire Service Kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Using The Deflation Button q Push the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 0604018634 Ti
108. Door xvi kate ae ERU aes 25 DOOR x sues essere eeu d ex REG OS s 22 Power Do sem ama gene ed eene da 24 Lubrication Body oooooooooooomomo ooo 363 L N tsi aas eee Exch ec ER NORRIS ee 319 Maintenance Free Battery 358 Maintenance General 353 Maintenance Procedures 353 Maintenance Schedule 0 406 Maintenance Schedules 406 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 165 350 Manual Service llle 419 Manual Transmission 230 377 Fluid Level Check o o ooooooo oo 377 Frequency Of Fluid Change 377 Lubricant Selection 377 403 Master Cylinder Brakes 375 Methanol c2 ke 5 Seas e EXE 4 297 MiEOES e ais eG BE oe ue ERE RR eat 89 Automatic Dimming eera serred serp adna 90 Electric Powered 00 91 Heated acuosas 93 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 287 MYTBEZEIBE 6 e scores ple E ERE 297 Multi Function Control Lever 104 New Vehicle Break In Period 76 INNI 433 Occupant Restraints 4 224 sos mamm mme x s 28 Oil Change Indicator resete korse inpe 180 Oil Change Indicator Reset 180 Oil Engine x RR E ae 353 400 401 Capacity estreias e RES 400 401 Change
109. E HN access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system WARNING e ONLY an authorized service technician should con nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle e If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port such as a driver behavior tracking device it may Be possible that vehicle systems including safety related systems could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death e Access or allow others to access information stored in your vehicle systems including per sonal information For further information refer to Cybersecurity in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel in your Owner s Manual on the DVD EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 serviced recently had a dea
110. Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear ax
111. FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system NOTE It is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any properly Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your WARNING local authorized dealer i Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is mended and can result in cooling system damage If overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with build up in the cool
112. Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the Reactive Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint push the adjust ment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 0309075916 Head Restraint 1 Release Button 2 Adjustment Button The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealership immediately NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealership WARNING A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants Follow the re installation instructions above prior to oper ating the vehicle or occupyin
113. INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS H INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 138 M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER Bl INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0 139 ENIG E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ECO 142 EVIC Control Buttons 178 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 146 la en m EO RINING UDINE A a aid Change Engine Oil Indicator System 180 Red Telltale Indicator Lights 149 Trip Computer ccce 180 Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights 160 Trip Button ccce ee 181 Green Telltale Indicator Lights 173 o AA 192 O Blue Telltale Indicator Light 175 Trip Functions cesses eee 182 White Telltale Indicator Light 176 136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Values Displayed 182 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Le tures vw ga he ee ER rm ge iR es 183 lg CXBERSECURITY exa Y SR ES 189 B UCONNECT RADIOS 4 gt 34014 4 n tamen i 191 E iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF EQUIPPED cer Eres Hae eee 191 NW UCONNECT SETTINGS s 5a dera mers 192 Buttons On The Faceplate 193 Buttons On The Touchscreen 193 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 5 0 Settings ll UCONNECT 5 0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
114. Interval isa deren 354 Checking 4 3 m rda sad edd Eg E SAT E hiss 353 Disposal 4 casted on ree ege ed 356 Filtet ua ui a ka Pe URS 357 Filter Disposal eee 356 Identification Logo 355 Materials Added To 0 356 Pressure Warning Light 156 Recommendation 354 355 400 Synthelie 0 6 kaka deb bu RR meee ades 356 A eio egde aed c egest 355 356 Oil Filter Change cese me cn 357 Oil Filter Selection 357 Oil Pressure Light i sut Sarees See Gels 156 Onboard Diagnostic System 349 Operating Precautions leere 349 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Overheating Engine ra sse mc EROR et 307 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 419 Paint Care it sata nee BE RR epu POE RS i a 379 Parking Brakes sea dais te wets PUR RR 248 Passing Light ros Gua isu erie mds 105 PetS endo ewok bra eaa eyed aly ea ey ee eee 76 Placard Tire And Loading Information 269 Power Door LOCKS acota ica eme Plt ae 24 Mirrors i23 rosa EG bG RE eS er ea ee es 91 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 128 STEET emare E ON 246 stereo T 125 Wind OWS aee ww So ace ner we ER 25 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts 38 434 INDEX IN Preparation For Jacking escis iens aene naa iaaa 324 Pretensioners Seat BeltS cion edd hd eR Roe Edw o 38 Radial Ply Tires 4 asc x euet x edP Rs
115. KE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely 0746042713 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR ACC ON RUN position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake A STARTING AND OPERATING 249 should always be applied whenever the driver is not in WARNING Continued the vehicle Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or i injury Also be certain to leave a manual transmis e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with sion in FIRST gear or REVERSE gear Failure to do access to an unlocked vehicle so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is or injury dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the
116. Means Light Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emer gencies a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light rae What It Means Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash de pending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position The light should A turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be driv able however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The l
117. NTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Continued after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range mark ings on the dipstick The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone Adding 1 quart 0 9 Liters of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine with oil Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil Continued temperature This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time whichever comes first The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers Engine
118. NU button to display the presently set activation speed Pushing the UP or DOWN buttons selects the speed limit Push and release the MENU button to confirm selection NOTE The setting can be increased or decreased by 5 mph or km h each time the UP DOWN button is pushed for speed settings above 20 mph 32 km h To increase or decrease the set speed rapidly push and hold the UP DOWN button Save the setting by briefly push ing the button when you approach the required setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 To cancel the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button On will flash on the display Push and release the DOWN V button Off will flash on the display Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Trip B Data Trip B On Through this option it is possible to activate On or deactivate Off the Trip B partial trip display For further information see Trip Computer For activation deactivation proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button 2 Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button to se
119. ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels 244 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your ve
120. Oil Selection 1 4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil Selection 1 4L Turbo Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 12991 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils This symbol certifies 0W 20 5W 20 0W 30 5W 30 and 10W 30 engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity 1 4L Engine SAE Grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Stan dard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compar
121. RNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 Road Tire Installation 2 Install the spare wheel and hand start the wheel bolts Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers WARNING 1 Mount the road tire on the axle To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack le handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion for correct wheel bolt torque 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are 1 Road Wheel 2 Wheel Cover properly seated against the wheel 0605077905 Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 6 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the nut towar
122. Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle Push the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Push the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting vehicl
123. Service Kit to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 5 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose
124. TING YOUR VEHICLE II seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the
125. The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The TPMS consists of the following components NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure Receiver Module and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Text Message Display a STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster an audible chime will be activated and the Low inflation pressure left or right front rear tire text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the veh
126. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation Harmful Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Additional Information 2015 FCA US LLC All rights reserved Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC Android is a trademark of Google Inc SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc Uconnect System Support U S residents call 1 877 855 8400 24 hours a day 7 days a week or visit DriveUconnect com Canadian residents call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French or visit DriveUconnect ca e Mon Fri 8 00 am 8 00 pm ET e Sat 9 00 am 5 00 pm ET e Sun Closed STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound syste
127. WARNING 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage Temperature Gauge e The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indi cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher tem perature when driving in hot weather or up moun tain grades It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 3 Speedometer e Indicates vehicle speed 4 Fuel Gauge The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the tank The switchin
128. What It Means Light Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake BRAKE application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reser voir 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Red Telltale Light What It Means United States Canada be felt during each stop If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentar
129. a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 270 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating sec tion of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of
130. aintain ing servicing and repairing FCA USA LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward lan guage with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific FCA USA LLC vehicles In cluded are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips e Call toll free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or e Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is
131. aired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death ONLY insert media e g USB SD card or CD into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source Media of unknown origin could possibly contain mali cious software and if installed in your vehicle it Continued 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE WARNING Continued may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached As always if you experience unusual vehicle be havior take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately NOTE FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach vehicle owners should e Routinely check www driveuconnect com software update to learn about available Uconnect software updates Only connect and use trusted media devices e g personal mobile phones USBs CDs Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can not be assured Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent For further information refer to Onboard Di agnostic System OBD II Cybersecurity in Maintaining Your Vehicle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 UCONNECT RADIOS For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual iPod
132. ally maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this section of the manual Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weathe
133. anel just below the radio UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper EB ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position Fog Light Switch Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Front Windshield Wiper Operation There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers The windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access these modes 031570041 Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off This is the normal position of the wiper lever Intermittent Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the first detent The wipers will operate intermittently NOTE The Intermittent function only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease Low Speed Push the lever downward to the second detent The wipers will operate at low speed High Speed Push the lever downward to the third detent The wipers will operate at high speed II UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Manual High Speed Mist CAUTION Continued Push the lever upward from the off position The wipers will operate at high speed to c
134. ap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the e Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 732 8243 instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s da s website for additional information www tc gc ca Manual and on all the labels attached to the child eng motorvehiclesafety safedrivers childsafety restraint index 53 htm Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Small Children Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height
135. as 1 2 3 etc NOTE If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL position when pushed for ward it is probably in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position In AutoStick mode the transmission gear 1 2 3 etc is displayed in the instrument cluster Move the shift lever to the right into the DRIVE D position for access to PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range A STARTING AND OPERATING 237 NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for th
136. at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area When returning the seatback to its upright position push rearward inel the seatback is properly latched 0354015375 Folded Rear Seats REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster Rear Seat Release Buttons ste The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the radio 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster An CAUTION indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 the heating elements minutes To manually shut the defroster off push the e Use care when washing the inside of the rear button a second time window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth window defroster only when the engine is operating and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR
137. ation Pressures 0 0 0 0 eese 274 Jacking ss cemere Coe ee oed a e 320 Eie Of DIeS ide e diet Rs drag id Rar dA 283 en INDEX 437 Load Capacity cerei sect y Re 268 270 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 287 Pressure Warning Light 160 Quality Grading lt sos sisas ahs a cans Ege d 421 Radial cec ue Rees aa 276 Replacement a odere aga tare galas ders 283 Rotatioti idee Be do God eae ae 286 Safety sor sede e ras ta eet RE 261 273 D EEUU 263 SNOW TOS ia ade a go bg de 278 Spare De iesu bso ee e us 279 280 281 Spinning ss cas eee a e e Rs 281 Tread Wear Indicators oo oo ooooo 282 Tire Safety Information lille 261 Tire Service Kit 308 309 310 313 314 316 317 318 To Open Hood 5s eee a cce ege pets 102 TOWING EP aay an enh oe Se ee F 302 Disabled Vehicle ich RR 340 Recreational 32252 pass sis rent is tete 303 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome 303 Trachis erpa tete Se PRAE ack Ed dE RUE eee 243 244 Traction Control 21222444 iba saku 254 Trailer IOWIDg iva cod ace hee eR ee 302 Transaxle Automate nenne iu es ted alal Pues d 12 Transmission llle 377 Automatic llle ees 233 377 Huid iue dci aru uc ge RUP CE e xa 377 Manual oss se hae ie RC 230 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 19 Transporting PetS ooooooooo oo ooo ooo 76 Tread Wear Indicators 00 282 Turnignals ss
138. ation and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised Stop the vehicle avoiding sharp braking and steering Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
139. ation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing 2 Rotate the bulb counter clockwise 3 Remove the bulb and replace as needed 4 Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place 5 Reinstall the plastic cap a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running 3 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp Lamps housing 1 Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right 4 Rotate bulb socket counter clockwise 2 Open the wheel housing access door 5 Remove the bulb and replace as needed 6 Install the bulb into socket and rotate bulb socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place 7 Reinstall the plastic cap 073310799 Wheel Housing Access Door 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Fog Lamps To replace the front fog lights see your authorized dealer Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 1 Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access to side marker lamp 2 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 3 Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 4 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket
140. back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Reco
141. brication or oil change Replace as required a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected it will stay on until the fault is cleared If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air direct
142. ccumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving i
143. ce of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers The Warranty with terms and conditions for maintain ing its validity The range of additional services available to FCA US LLC customers NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction a INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains a complete listing of all subjects contains the information you desire Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout Si h ificati f hicl d h ince the specification of your vehicle depends on the this Owner s Manual items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment 6 INTRODUCTION e 1 E Li 8
144. ch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat WARNING Continued you see or hear steam coming from under the hood
145. cle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 2 5 manual transmission or 7 grade or greater automatic transmission hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle in NEUTRAL manual transmission vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear 256 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Uconnect Settings Refer to Uconnect Settings in for further information Electronic Stability Control ESC The Electronic Stability Control ESC system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
146. collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position 022669375 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STAR
147. compatibility and to find phone pairing in structions 2 Reduce background noise Wind and passenger con versations are examples of noise that may impact recognition 3 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver 4 Each time you give a Voice Command you must first push either the VR or PHONE button wait until after the beep then say your Voice Command 5 You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a Voice Command from current category All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 VR And Phone Buttons 1 Push to MUTE 2 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call Send Or Re ceive A Text 3 Push To End Call 4 Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system o Push the VR button Ww After the beep say i amp e Cancel to stop a current voice session Listening e Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Cancel LN Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system s status Cues appear on the touch
148. ctivation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was manually turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds and flash the ESC activation light when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light ESC Y gt This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off For further information refer OFF to Electronic Stability Control ESC in Starting And Operating What It Means a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly y Certain conditions such as a loose or missin
149. d also be checked at this time e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced
150. d battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen e The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station e The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order
151. d for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause Continued CAUTION Continued sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition 290 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge Premium TPM System With Comfort Cluster while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes 1 This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure instrument cluster Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability
152. d the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion for correct wheel bolt torque 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel Spare Tire Stowage Reverse instructions of the spare removal section Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack
153. des output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING WARNING Continued No objects should be placed over or near the air some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Al bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi covers or attempt to open them manually You may tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad damage the air bags and you could be injured vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk because the air bags may no longer be functional of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad The protective co
154. dition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the out board side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury 2 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Located above the side windows The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In The SABIC deploys downward covering the side win WARNING dows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the WARNING headliner out of
155. does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed STARTING AND OPERATING 287 E ES O ER E 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold tire pressure 288 STARTING AND OPERATING HN The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the cond
156. dows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a Continued 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued location accessible to children Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death L Power Window Switches Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch for approximately one a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 second release and the window will go down automati cally To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the driver door handle To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 0222
157. e Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such Continued CAUTION Continued damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 WARNING Continued operation with reduced or no power
158. e Select from psi or kPa Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press the Voice Response Length button on the touchscreen and select from Brief or Long 19 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE e Show Command List When in this display you may change the Show Com mand List settings To change the Show Command List settings press the Show Command List button on the touchscreen and select from Always With Help or Never Clock amp Date After pressing the Clock amp Date button on the touch screen the following settings will be available Set Time and Format When in this display you may set the time and format manually Press the Set Time and Format button then choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust then select AM or PM e Show Time Status When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press the Show Time Status button on the touchscreen and select from ON or OFF e Set Date When in this display you may set the date manually Press the Set Date button
159. e parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the gear selector shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the Continued WARNING Continued vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift an automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE turn the engine OFF apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key When the ignition is in the LOCK OFF key removal position an automatic transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement Continued 238 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the veh
160. e proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly a oo NO THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenge
161. e Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the wiper blade out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil
162. e dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Recline Adjustment The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat To recline the seatback lift up the recline lever lean back until the desired position has been reached and release the lever Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Seat Height Adjustment EZ Entry Feature The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry using a lever located on the outboard side of the seat feature for rear seat passengers Pull forward on the Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump release lever located on the outboard side of the seatback the lever downward to lower the seat height dump the seatback forward then slide the seat forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat 0309027383 Height Adjuster EZ Entry Lever a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Lift the seatback upri
163. e door will lock NOTE To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle the doors will automatically unlock if the driv er s door handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition Driver s Power Door Lock Handle ELE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Auto Door Locks When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles speed exceeds 12 mph 20 km h To change the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly push the MENU button to enter the MENU screen Push the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight Auto Door Locks Push the MENU button use the UP A or DOWN V buttons to turn setting ON or OFF Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel in your Own er s Manual on your DVD for further information ER POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches There are single window controls located on the shifter bezel below the climate controls which operate the driver and passenger door windows The window con trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power win
164. e grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tun
165. e impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection In side impacts the Side Air Bags deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the Side Air Bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from inflating Side Air Bags To get the best protection from the Side
166. e of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play To make your selection press the Tune Start button on the touch screen select On or Off 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re subscribe Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Restore Settings After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Restore Settings When this feature is
167. e precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued WARNING Continued Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open A STARTING AND OPERATING 301 ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap e Damage to the fuel system or emission control The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the system could result from using an improper fuel vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the filler cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermar ket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING Never have any smoking materials
168. e the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 66 Ft Lbs 90 N m M12 x 125 17 mm Steel Wheels Only 74 Ft Lbs 100 N m Aluminum Wheels Only 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice WEENING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when Torque Patterns operating the jack or changing the wheel After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque tobe Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You against the wheel could be crushed Never put any part of your body Continued a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 WARNING Continued Jack Location under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service cent
169. e top does not relearn repeat the procedure a second time Wind Stop The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera tion Therefore it can remain installed when the top is up MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 0304078977 Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 0304077878 This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror The On Off symbol on the button will illuminate when the auto dimming feature is enabled Automatic Dimming Mirror a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors The power mirror c
170. e up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumula
171. ear Park Assist system is unavailable without reference to the sensor in failure condition If even a single sensor fails the entire system must be disabled The system is turned off automatically Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths In washing stations clean sensors quickly keeping the va por jet high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in 10 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 cm from the sensors Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors Park Assist System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper
172. ed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle e Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor Continued mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of v
173. ed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attach ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in in the vehicle by the seat belt the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause infant or child restraint It could come loose in a serious personal injury collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their
174. ee ii bs 106 173 UCI Connector so RR ES RE XR Uniform Tire Quality Grades Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector Unleaded Gasoline 438 INDEX IN Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 36 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading i e nS eRe RR he 270 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Security Alarm Disarming 16 Vehicle Storage s ese Rx hr eR s 220 394 Warnings And Cautions e 7 Warranty Information 0 4 418 Washer Adding Fluid 5 ra 366 Washers Windshield 109 112 Washing Vehicle cosas e m n 380 Water Driving Through o oooooooo ooo 244 Wheel And Wheel TriM 382 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care 382 Wind Buffeting Window Fogging 4 2 em re em ales 219 Windows llle 25 POWeF lt atlassi 4624 09 5 48 rd 25 Windshield Defroster 79 212 213 Windshield Washers 00 109 112 Windshield Wiper Blades 363 Windshield Wipers ss sece ise RE sass st 109 Wiper Blade Replacement 363 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained
175. ehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel bolts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for proper closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
176. ehicles to touch each other as this sparks away from the battery 3 Remove the protective cover over the positive battery post To remove the cover push the locking tab and pull upward on the cover could establish a ground connection and personal 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission injury could result into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Jump Starting Procedure 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery BEENING 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of result in personal injury or property damage due to the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery battery explosion and the fuel injection system CAUTION WARNING A A Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative Fail foll h 1 1 alare o follow Hese Proce ures could result on post of the discharged battery The resulting electri damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle cal spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific Connecting The Jumper Cables ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2
177. en operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS zi and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle Y a set the Mode control to Recirculate ess with A C on and roll up the windows UM Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level d rali with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or 1 dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature O FA OS control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clock
178. er where it can be raised on a lift e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under the front driver s seat on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack And Jack Handle Location 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Removal 2 Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut Use the wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle 1 Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the cargo area 0605011841 0605001773 Lowering Raising Spare Tire Winch Access Plug WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench tool only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can dam age the winch 3 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle Spare Tire 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel IRIS Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid t
179. es must be released 1 Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever located on the left kick panel rearward Hood Release Lever 2 Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the hood near the center and raise the hood Aa UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 031335904 Hood Safety Latch Location 3 Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side left side when standing in front of the hood of the engine compartment Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position Hood Prop Rod In hot climates the prop rod may be hot Pick up the prop rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION LIGHTS Multifunction Lever To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower hood to approximately 12 in 30 cm The multifunction lever located on the left side of the and drop the hood to close Make sure hood is fully steering wheel controls the operation of the headlights closed for both latches Never drive vehicle unless headlight beam selection passing light and turn signals hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE The headlights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON RUN position WARNING Headlights Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open Rotate the end of the multifunction
180. esign standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric e tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT A STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Secti
181. essive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehi
182. etractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 a N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI strap See the section Installing Child Restraints WARNING Continued Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to A attach a tether anchor tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that
183. f opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof Insert the hex wrench and turn moving the sunroof to the desired location Sun Shade If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof there is a sun shade that can be open or closed To open the sun shade push the tab and move the shade to a full open position Manual Sun Shade 034235956 _ 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watts 13 Amps power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the floor console for added convenience This power outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power devices ND e Po
184. failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle 278 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Do not use Summer tires in snow ice conditions You could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid
185. fly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button then high light the Buzzer Volume Push and release the MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE GSI Gear Shift Indicator This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator in two submenus On and Off e On turns on a fuel economy upshift light in the instrument cluster for optimum fuel economy when operating in base driving mode Off the fuel economy upshift light is disabled To set the required option proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the two sub menus 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to navigate the two sub menus 3 Select the required sub menu and then briefly push and release the MENU button 4 Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to the sub menu When you have made the required settings briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the sub menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settin
186. follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield 060835932 Battery Posts 1 Positive Post Covered With Protective Cap 2 Negative Post a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 WARNING 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the electrical contact You could be seriously injured parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your WARNING skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is fl bl d losive K fl Oe ee ee Do not allow v
187. from the engine cooling system CAUTION do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on Small punctures up to 1 4 inch 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for service Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver s seal O Tire Service Kit Components 1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob osos35908 2
188. ft Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a conventional automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Manual Transmission e Vehicle can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe engine and or transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not cov ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
189. g System TPMS TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Sensor to become inoperable After using an after tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the market tire sealant it is recommended that you take replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your to continue to function properly sensor function checked CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and waming have been established for the tire size Continued A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the en gine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilo meters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as ESC possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC A
190. g a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an autho
191. g a seat Continued WARNING Continued Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or por table DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint push the adjust ment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Refer to Occu pant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on tether routing a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 NOTE To remove the head restraint raise it as far as it can go then push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up To reinstall the head restraint put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height 1 Release Button 2 Adjustment Button Head Restraint 0309075916 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants Follow the re installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latch
192. g gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev eral typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be ser viced as soon as possible if this occurs 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE CAUTION WARNING Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine above can reach higher temperatures than in normal control system It also could affect fuel economy and operating conditions This can cause a fire if you driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic drive slowly or park over flammable substances such converter damage and power loss will soon occur as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result Immediate service is required in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 Rear Fog Light Indicator If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light Rear Fog Light Indicator O This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on What It Means Rear Defrost Light Yellow Telltale Light What I
193. g on of the digital warning light indi cates that 1 1 3 gallons of fuel are left in the tank in this situation refuel as soon as possible Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty any gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic converter 5 Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge Turbo Gauge Instant Consumption Bargraph Depending on what options and trim level your vehicle is equipped with there are three gauges available Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge This gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at Turbo Gauge This gauge shows the current turbo usage e Instant Consumption Bargraph This bargraph shows the instant fuel consumption the style changes according to vehicle version while mini mum and maximum values change depending on selected unit The possible labels are e Km l e 1 100 km mpg NOTE Different trips may have different values even if the same driving style is maintained Some factors that may impact the calculated index value are e Traffic conditions Trip duration Temperature engine and ambient 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ECO 0403076447 ECO Instrument Cluster ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 WARNING 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage Temperature Gauge
194. g or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height JAANUS EA reuse allowed by the child seat directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e After a child restraint is install
195. g the radiator damage and may decrease corrosion protection e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al lows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To pre vent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of FCA Ma terial Standard MS 90032 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
196. ght and push the seat rearward to its locked position once the rear passengers are seated Memory Feature Both front seats have a memory feature which can operate in two ways Memory Function Option 1 Full Seat Back And Track Fore Aft Position Memory After using the EZ entry function the seatback angle and the Track fore aft adjuster can both re lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright Memory Function Option 2 Seat Back Only Memory After using the EZ entry function the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last fore aft memory position on the tracks This results in the seat back memory being set only The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore aft memory posi tion To then reset the fore aft track memory feature to reestablish Memory Function Option 1 the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1 Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats Push the switch a second time to shut the
197. gs Exit Menu This function closes the initial menu screen Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button when the Exit icon is displayed then push and release the MENU button to exit the menu screen A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor mation This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC working with its suppliers evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed Similar to a computer or other devices your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and perfor mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys tems The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist even if the most recent version of vehicle software such as Uconnect software is installed WARNING e It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle s systems are breached It may be possible that vehicle systems including safety related systems could be im p
198. h access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could Continued WARNING Continued operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the left To unlock the door turn the key to the right Refer to Body Lubrication in Main taining Your Vehicle for maintenance procedures Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether
199. h must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Six Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK Refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 236 STARTING AND OPERATING EA Shift Lever Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information Toggling the shift lever forward or rearward while in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster
200. he danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission 5 Turn Off the ignition Retainer 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally Preparations For Jacking opposite of the jacking position For ex i T O ample if changing the right front tire 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or block the left rear wh el slippery areas KA 0606506152 a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Continued WARNING Continued e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where
201. he parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmis sion into FIRST gear or REVERSE apply the park ing brake turn the vehicle OFF remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Continued 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate If the driver s door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the driver s door handle indicating locked when the door is closed th
202. her in formation 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Generic Warning Indicator Light Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Generic Warning Indicator Light N The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur Oil Change Request Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure External Light Failure Fuel Cut Off Not Available Parking Sensor Failure DST System Failure Icy Road Condition Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Icy Road Condition Indicator Light AN This light will illuminate during an icy road condition UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light 171 Yellow Telltale Light no What It Means Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs Stop Light Failure Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Stop Light Failure Indicator Light This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails The failure relating to this light could be e One or more blown bulbs e A blown protection fuse e A break in the electrical connection 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Glow Plug Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Glow Plug Light If Equipped This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperatu
203. hicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Flowing Rising Water WARNING WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Cautions CAUTION and Warnings before doing so e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through Continued 246 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Continued standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicl
204. hicle Refer to Rear Park Assist Display for further information Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal instrument panel Icon appears on display Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC where provided 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM While audible signals are emitted the audio system is not muted The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant If this condition occurs for the external sensors the signal is turned off after 3 seconds stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls Failure Indications A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated during REVERSE gear engagement by the instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC display The warning icon is illuminated and a message is displayed on the EVIC display if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON RUN position Failures are indi cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition the EVIC shall indicate that the R
205. ht and left to clear the area around the from the positive post of the discharged vehicle front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Push the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed push the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the t
206. ial towing service Towing Condition Wheels OFF The AUTOMATIC TRANS MANUAL TRANSMIS Ground MISSION SION Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED If transmission is operable e Transmission in NEUTRAL e 65 mph 104 km h max speed Wheel Lift Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Front OK OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not Continued CAUTION Continued attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Automatic Transmission e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground If the ignition key is unavailable or the battery is discharged refer to Shi
207. icle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected an audible chime will be activated and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System text mes sage will display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following sce narios e Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors e Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals e Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings e Using tire chains on the vehicle e Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 292 STARTING AND OPERATING HI NOTE Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly o The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire
208. icle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 239 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion e When shifting into PARK firmly move the lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position P With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete sto
209. ight will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Oil Pressure Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the ve qx hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 Engine Temperature Warning Light i Her What It Means Light Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold E If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the tem perature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for ser vice Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further infor mation
210. ild restraint Please see the following table for more information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022669374 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys tem once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center posi tion does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an out board position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
211. ily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Charging System Warning Light Red Telltale What It
212. in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will
213. iner absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may Continued WARNING Continued cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 inch 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Please see your a
214. ing the problem will turn the MIL off TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended A STARTING AND OPERATING 303 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NEU NOT ALLOWED TRAL Dolly Tow Front OK OK Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK NOTE When recreationally towing your vehicle always This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly with follow applicable state and provincial laws Contact state the front wheels OFF the ground and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground at any This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer legal highway speed for any distance if the manual provided all four wheels are OFF the ground transmission is in NEUTRAL 304 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WH
215. ing system To prevent scalding OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the possible system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine gine damage may result coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank Cooling System Pressure Cap Aa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the bottom and top lines marked COLD FILL RANGE As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac tory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a m
216. interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine compe puerro This engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations provide satisfactory fuel 01 economy and performance when using high quality unleaded Regular gasoline 9 having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the R M 2 method For optimum perfor mance and fuel economy the use of Premium 91 octane gasoline or higher is recommended While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87 hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern However if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound see your dealer imme diately Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle
217. ires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 WARNING 3 Remove the shift lever override access cover located on the right side of the shift lever housing by prying Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener at the bottom edge of the cover ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the i Y following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever Shift Lever Override Access Hole 1 Turn the engine OFF 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 5 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover access hole and push and hold the override release lever in 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commerc
218. is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will Continued CAUTION Continued need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended aaa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission If Equipped Use only MOPAR AW 1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Convertible Top Rails
219. ition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 159 kPa This tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pres sure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimize
220. ition key When the ignition is in the Continued WARNING Continued LOCK OFF key removal position an automatic transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key removal position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the transmis sion is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switc
221. l State 8 Turn ignition OFF Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light is OFF System is now reset and the engine may be started 9 Turn Hazard Flashers OFF Manually If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 14L 347 E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 348 E ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 349 Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II Cybers curty ier re PRSE 349 H EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS sess ees 350 M REPLACEMENT PARTS 352 M DEALER SERVICE o o o oooooo 352 H MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 353 Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid O Exhaust System Cooling System MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN 346 Brake System s 3e e aree d aes 374 Manual Transmission If Equipped 377 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 377 Appearance Care And Protection From COLTOSIOTR Leeds RE ES TRY ga 3
222. lay shows the amount of fuel in the tank The switching on of the digital warning light indi cates that 1 1 3 gallons of fuel are left in the tank in this situation refuel as soon as possible Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty any gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic converter WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS IMPORTANT The warning indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes sage and or acoustic signal when applicable These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual which you are advised to read carefully in all cases Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication All active telltales will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Some telltales are optional and may not appear KEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 Red Telltale Indicator Lights Air Bag Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during startup stays on or turns on e while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible This r
223. le of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size A STARTING AND OPERATING 281 spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
224. lear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle This operation will continue until the lever is released When the lever is released the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the Front Windshield Washer Operation windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Pull the windshield wiper washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the Continued 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation With the front wind shield wiper active rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer
225. least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals A STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Term Definition Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi cle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door A Fa 054901778 Example Tire Placard Location Door STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Tire And Loading Information Placard THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR PIOBORTA p195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI INFLATION PRESS RE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 Example Tire Placard Location B Pillar 811b5a9
226. lect Trip B data Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V buttons to turn ON or OFF 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Audio Repetition Repeat Audio Information With this function active the EVIC display shows infor mation relevant to the sound system e Radio tuned radio station frequency automatic tuning activation or AutoStore e CD audio CD MP3 track number 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE To activate On or to deactivate Off the sound system info displaying proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP A or Down V button to highlight See Radio and push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings If the radio has Uconnect refer to the appropriate Uconnect Radio Supplement for further information Navigation Repetition If Equipped With this function active the EVIC display shows infor mation relevant to the navigation system e The turn by turn indication e The distance to next maneuver e The name of the street 1 or 2 lines To activate On
227. lever up when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision 20 ward to the first detent for headlight operation Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031410253 Headlight Operation NOTE When the headlights are turned on the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 High Beams D With the low beams activated push the multi function lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released Parking Lights To turn on the parking lights remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF LOCK position and turn on the headlights D 07 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights To activate the Daytime Running Lights DRL rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol NOTE The low beams and side taillights will not be on with DRL If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus Refer to UConnect settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Turn Signals
228. lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire Fuel Filler Cap Continued 302 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued e A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the g ASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolv
229. ll lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph 20 km h To make your selection press the Auto Door Locks button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HI e Remote Door Unlock Door Unlock When Driver is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button you must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Radio Off Delay When this feature is selected the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP OFF To change the Radio Off Delay status press the 0 MIN or 20 MIN button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval e Radio Off With Door If Equipped When this feature is selected the radio will turn off when a door is opened To make your selection select from On or Off on the touchscreen Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the
230. loited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Continued WARNING Continued e Vehicle modifications or failure to properly main tain your vehicle may change the handling charac teristics of your vehicle and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system Changes to the steering system suspension braking system tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance Improperly inflated and un evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor mance Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death A STARTING AND OPERATING 259 ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC Off switch This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily pushing the switch again This will restore the normal ESC On mode of o
231. loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a A STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern 280 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Compact Spare Tire If
232. lt properly 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lu
233. lure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Electronic Speed Control Buttons a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET button and release Release the accelerator and
234. luster Speedometer e Indicates vehicle speed Tachometer e This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage Temperature Gauge e The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indi cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher tem perature when driving in hot weather or up moun tain grades It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 WARNING Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE 4 Fuel Gauge The digital disp
235. m If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 020274421 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s d
236. m controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT AUX Media Player etc and can also be used to select enter an item while scrolling through menu The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Radio Operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next The air conditioning and heating system is designed to listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch make you comfortable in all types of weather will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset button RADIO OPERATION AND
237. mately 12 in 30 cm up to 55 in 140 cm from the center of the rear fascia bumper and up to 24 in 60 cm from the corners of the rear fascia bumper depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 If several obstacles are detected the Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneu ver Rear Park Assist Warning Display The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the Uconnect Settings It provides audible and visual warn ings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rear Park Assist Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the vehicle If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region the display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and will produce an audible alert As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent If an obstacle is detected in the left
238. ming this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 2 AIC Button Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 3 Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control Push the button for warmer temperature settings 4 Blower Control Up Down Buttons There are 12 fixed blower speeds The blower control up down buttons regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you push or hold the blower control up button and decreases when you push or hold the blower control down button The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by pushing the blower control up or down buttons The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions 5 Mix Mode D Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Performing this function
239. mmendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the ch
240. mp Orange Radiator Fan High Speed F08 40 Amp Orange Blower Motor F09 10 Amp Red Powertrain F10 10 Amp Red Horn F11 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F11 10 Amp Red Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F14 5 Amp Tan High Beam Shutter F15 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F16 7 5 Amp Brown Transmission F17 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F17 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F18 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F18 5 Amp Tan Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F19 7 5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning F20 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats If Equipped F21 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump F22 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain F23 20 Amp Yellow Anti Lock Brake Valves F24 7 5 Amp Brown Stability Control System F30 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps F82 30 Amp Green Sunroof Convertible Top F83 20 Amp Yellow Cooling Pump If Equipped F84 10 Amp Red Transmission 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F85 30 Amp Green i Rear Defroster F87 5 Amp Tan Rear Defroster F90 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors If Equipped VEHICLE STORAGE ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 started again days you may want to take steps to
241. n the touchscreen e Brightness When in this display you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights on or off Adjust the brightness with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale be tween the and buttons on the touchscreen e Language When in this display you may select one of multiple languages English Espafiol Frangais for all display no menclature including the trip functions and the naviga tion system if equipped Press the Language button on the touchscreen then press the desired language button on the touchscreen A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed Press the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen then On or Off Units After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information System EVIC or Driver Information Display DID The following select able units of measure are listed below e US Changes the EVIC DID to US units of measure Metric Changes the EVIC DID to Metric units of measure e Custom e Fuel Consumption Select from MPG US MPG UK L 100 km or km L e Temperature Select from C or F e Pressur
242. n the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising b
243. nd for the three quarter open spoiler position Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one quarter open position Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top Manual Close For manual close push and hold the close button until desired position until one quarter open position Push and hold again for full close position NOTE Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present Refer to Fluids Lubes and Genuine Part in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for information CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips e Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II WARNING 2 Begin with the top in the fully closed position using manual mode The convertible top does not provide the structural 3 protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top ca
244. ne coolant antifreeze Refer to Engine Compartment in this section for fur ther information WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might b
245. ne over speed The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first second or third gear Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful A STARTING AND OPERATING 243 e in snow or icy conditions To select second or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop tap the shift lever rearward once or twice The system will ignore shift commands that would cause engine lugging or overspeed An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to the DRIVE position You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury DRIVING
246. ng for cuts frays or loose parts If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if th P y app y ee bing etc buckles do not work properly Convertible Top Care If Equipped NOTE Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material e Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pressure may force past the weather strips e Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleanings easier
247. ng procedure If the engine fails to start after eight attempts allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes then repeat the procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank con tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle To prevent damage to the starter do not continu ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 230 STARTING AND OPERATING HN After Starting MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will Five Speed Manual Transmission decrease as the engine warms up Turbocharger Cool Down WARNING This vehicle is equipped with an after run pump to cool You or others could be injured if you leave the the turbocharger after the engine is shut off Depending vehicle unattended without having the parking on the type of driving and the amount
248. ng this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 10 Temperature Control Down Button Provides temperature down control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE If the temperature is lowered until Lo is dis played all high voltage Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning HVAC systems are deactivated and am bient air is circulated according to the Heating Ventila tion and Air Conditioning HVAC control settings 11 Climate Control ON OFF Button Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF 12 Recirculation Control Button Push and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON NOTE When in Defrost mode the Recirculation button will flash if pushed This indicates that you can not proceed to this mode due to fogging risk Climate Control Functions Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 outlets If Economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows If fog or mist appears on the windshield
249. nnot be expected to prevent the ejection Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position of the occupants in a collision Therefore it is impor 4 CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all tional three seconds times Death or serious injuries could occur if you are 5 Release the OPEN button ejected from the vehicle during a collision 6 Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure closed position If your power convertible top does not operate in the 7 CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top Auto Opening Closing mode automatically opening begins to cycle fully open then release the CLOSED closing to the one quarter open and three quarter open button comfort stops or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the fully open position and then close to the 1 4 open position 1 Confirm that the door trunk lid are closed a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success ful Auto Open Close will now be functional Trunk lid operation will be functional Remote Keyless Power Top Function will be functional NOTE DO NOT interrupt this activity If the power convertibl
250. nsumption e Average speed B Travel time B driving time Current Trip can be used to display the figures relating to e Range e Instantaneous consumption NOTE Trip B functions may be excluded see Trip B Data Range and Instantaneous consumption cannot be reset Values Displayed Range This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank assuming that driving conditions will not change The message will appear on the display in the following cases e Distance less than 30 miles or 50 km a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 e The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running NOTE The range depends on several factors driving style type of route freeway residential mountain roads etc and conditions of use of the vehicle load tire pressure etc Trip planning must take into account the above notes Distance Traveled This value shows the distance covered since the last reset Average Economy This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset Instantaneous Economy This indicates the fuel consumption The value is con stantly updated The message will appear on the display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running Average Speed This value shows the vehicle s average speed as a func tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset Travel Time This value sh
251. nted electronic sensors to A STARTING AND OPERATING 293 monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings D The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a low pressure text message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color 10 37 am 05 31 2012 low pressure 055874193 Low Tire Indicator Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system 294 STARTING AND OPERATING will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion TPMS Warning
252. nts When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Continued Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft cloth A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp cloth Dry with a soft cloth 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Seat Belt Maintenance WARNING Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checki
253. of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 266 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
254. on Pressures 274 MUNI Serta nessa quid Sees sid Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 276 POEET JE UNO eter ee Radial Py Tires eese us U Premium TPM System With TFT Tire Press Tire pesa dede eas degen Dawa 277 Gace information Run Flat Tires If Equipped 278 ll FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Spare Tires If Equipped 279 Engine viitavat saeti e uc a kris 296 Tire SPINNING sesse pasce ms Fur i e peer uns 281 Reformulated Gasoline 297 Tread Wear Indicators 282 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 297 ASA eae toco dee tte s 283 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 298 Replacement Tires 00 283 MMT In Gasoline 0 298 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 285 Materials Added To Fuel 298 226 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Fuel System Cautions sace acer Rr 299 M TRAILER TOWING 2 hne Ren 302 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 300 B RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND E ADDING FUEL 33 ved ak SS Ox dude i 301 OA a esikas tei ee Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 301 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 303 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 302 A STARTING AND OPERATING 227 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts
255. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 424 INDEX IN Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 371 Adding Fuels oer sette ot Ee m npn 301 Adding Washer Fluid ics eec e 544455 366 Additives Fuel 0 0 0 0 00 ce eee ee eee 298 Air Bag etw at me sd S 41 42 Advance Front Air Bag 42 43 Air Bag Operation sss ee e ma ed 44 Air Bag Warning Light 00 54 Driver Knee Air Bag 1 ee ee ee 45 Enhanced Accident Response 52 Event Data Recorder EDR 56 Front Air Bag cuicos A1 42 If A Deployment Occurs ooo ooooo 50 Knee Impact Bolsters 0 45 Maintaining Your Air Bag System 55 Air Bag Deployment ss 41
256. on the touchscreen then press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust e Sync Time If Equipped When in this display you may sync the time with GPS Press the Sync Time button on the touchscreen and select from ON or OFF A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance button on the touchscreen the following setting will be available e Hill Start Assist When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection press the Hill Start Assist button on the touchscreen and select On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on while the engine is running To make your selection press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch screen then choose On or Off The button will highlight indicating that the setting has been selected Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks button on the touch screen the following setting will be available e Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected all doors wi
257. on width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in 264 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire A STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
258. onth When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Keep the front of the radiator
259. ontrols are located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Switches The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror push the mirror select switch to either the L left or R right to select the mirror you need to adjust 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Using the mirror control switch push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Spotter Mirror Folding Mirrors 030436592 Spotter Mirror If Equipped The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage The mirror has three detent positions full forward normal and full rearward Some models are equipped with a driver s side spotter mirror The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of visibility on the driver s side of the vehicle KE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window
260. oonlight Sonata Play genre Classical 0101073171 Uconnect 5 0 Media es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Voice Text Reply Uconnect will announce incoming text messages Push the PHONE button amp eand say Listen Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system 1 Once an incoming text message is read to you push the PHONE button amp e After the beep say Re ply 2 Listen to the Uconnect prompts After the beep repeat one of the pre defined messages and follow the system prompts PRE DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes Stuck in traffic No Start without me See you later I ll be late PRE DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Okay Where are you I will be lt num Call me Are you there ber minutes yet late I ll call you I need direc See you in later tions number of I m on my way Can t talk right minutes I m lost Dow Thanks TIP Your mobile phone must have the full implementa tion of the Message Access Profile MAP to take advan tage of this feature For details about MAP visit UconnectPhone com Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup ports reading incoming text messages only Radio Operation And Mobile Phones Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in A A 8 your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated 208
261. oor or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Opening Power Top Remote Function Opening Power Top Remote Function 1 OPEN Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power Top Open The roof will stop opening when ever the unlock button on the key fob is released or when it reaches the spoiler position The remote keyless power top function can only be used with the engine off NOTE If your power convertible top does not open with the remote please refer to the Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and 0213069251 others around you Key Fob Before operating the power top make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a NOTE The remote keyless power top function can be gt person or animal used to open the power top to the spoiler position Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 WARNING Continued e Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the con
262. opardize the user s safety or the safety of others When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly 254 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from exc
263. or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Children who have out grown their Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger who have Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the ve hicle Restraints out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HN Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facin
264. or side glass select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humid ity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable indicator light shall blink if EB conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Con trols the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recircula tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se lected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Operation 1 Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel the indicator will illuminate when on 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature con trol buttons Once the desired temperature is dis played the system will achieve and automatic
265. orrectly fitted buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of child restraints Under no circumstances are they to the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for the child restraint installation instead of buckling it attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad ditional information on ALR Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022669375 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor e Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 72 THINGS TO KNOW
266. ot use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 inch 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued WARNING Continued Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warn ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Flush immedi ately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Continued a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 WARNING Continued e Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a phy sician immediately Keep Tire Service Kit
267. ows the time elapsed since the last reset Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Dimmer The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly NOTE The brightness of the instrument panel may change while travelling following an event that causes switching from day to night conditions or vice versa in the passenger compartment e g in a tunnel on avenues in shadows under bridges etc 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE To adjust the brightness proceed as follows 1 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to set the required brightness level 2 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings Speed Beep Speed Limit With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit mph or km h to immediately alert the driver when the set limit is exceeded To set the speed limit proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter the Main MENU 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to select Speed Beep Push and release the MENU button push and release the UP Aor DOWN buttons to select Speed Limit activation On or deactivation Off 3 When the function is activated On briefly push and release the ME
268. p NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 240 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions
269. peration NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pushing the switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power Continued 260 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is reduced ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR ACC ON RUN position for four seconds If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the p
270. performance Poor cold start and cold drivability ncreased risk for fuel system component corrosion MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits When avail able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom mended Visit www toptiergas com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers Indiscriminate use of fuel s
271. person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems 16FF500 126 AB 2015 FCA US LLC All Rights Reserved FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing amp Corporate Communication S p A used under license by FCA US LLC A Second Edition Rev 1 Printed in U S A
272. placement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash To Arm The System Push the Key Fob LOCK button To Disarm The System Push the Key Fob UNLOCK button or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle However you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alar
273. r Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Driver And Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped 2 BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The Belt Alert feature is active when ever the ignition switch is in the AVV START posi tion Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV START position an intermittent chime will signal for a few seconds If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled when the ignition switch is firs
274. r condi tions Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging NOTE Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will au tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Summer Operation Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use Recir culation A C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Winter Operation Wh
275. r tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than a Y of an inch 6 mm A STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Spring Summer Fall and Winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M 5 M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use Summer tires only in sets of four
276. rcumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time whichever comes first The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4 000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine RPM s This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Check engine oil level Change Indicator System Check windshield washer fluid level Change oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator sys wear or damage tem turns on Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as master cylinder and fill as needed required Inspect brake pads rotors and hoses Check function of all interior and exterior lights Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Check and adjust hand brake Inspect exhaust system Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals Inspect engine air cleaner if
277. re Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment e Distance driven e Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for 204 STARTING AND OPERATING HN wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu It is recommended you contact your authorized tire facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions lent to the originals in size quality and performance you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect T
278. re Service Kit Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1 4 inch 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit Do n
279. re gauge Do not make a visual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from
280. re is less than 22 F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not DO been used The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds If equipped with a block heater harness the message Plug In Engine Heater will be dis played in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Green Telltale Indicator Lights Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Tell tale Light What It Means Turn Signal Indicator Lights lt ar gt The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se lected as well as the exterior turn signal lamp s front and rear as selected when the multi function lever is moved down LEFT or up RIGHT Park Headlight ON Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Park Headlight ON Indicator Light p This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped Green Telltale Light 0 Front Fog Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on What It Means Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light Green Telltale Light gt Cruise
281. rea with metal wires or any other material Failure to use Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square proper fuses may result in serious personal injury feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire fire and or property damage vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome is off and that all the other services are switched off surfaces Allow the top to dry before lowering Vacuuming and or disengaged the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will decrease the top s drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING Continued E e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module BCM and is located on the driver s side under the instrument panel Fuse Panel Cavity Veide es Nn Mini Fuse Description 1 F12 7 5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam 2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Vehicle Fuse Num
282. read Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading the safety handling and ride of your vehicle Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris Index and Speed Symbol of a tire tics resulting in changes to steering handling and It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously able handling and stress to steering and suspen affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 285 WARNING Continued TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use Of traction devices require sufficient tire to body
283. rely engaged 060535916 Front Jacking Location 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 0605015399 060535917 Rear Jacking Location Jack Location 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be WARNING placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and to the wheel to be changed hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 5 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning CAUTION the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the provides maximum stability spare tire is mounted incorrectly 6 Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel bolts 7 Install the spare wheel and hand start the wheel bolts WARNING Lightly tighten the bolts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack
284. return to the set speed 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to the Park Assist System Usage Precautions for the limitations of this system and recommendations The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles in the horizontal direction from approxi
285. rief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 CAUTION WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people should be considered a normal part of the break in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously not interpreted as a problem injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your BAREIN TIES vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat be
286. right from its center position and the lights are always on Push the switch to the left from its center position and the lights are always off Leave the switch in the center position and the lights are turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed The switch on the right side of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights Push the switch to the right to turn 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left light CAUTION Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery Interior Light Timing Center Position There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated When the key is removed from the ignition within two minutes of the ignition being turned off a 10 second timer is activated When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off Interior Light Timing On Right Position e When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated NOTE The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON RUN position Front Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument p
287. rited comering 1 To activate the Sport mode push the SPORT button SPORT Button Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Push the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode 252 STARTING AND OPERATING HN BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still func tion However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness You may notice increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake System Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Con trol System TCS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Four Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
288. rized dealer immediately 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pushed The hazard lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light button Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem e Unlock the power door locks Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs when the system is active a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV START or MAR to ignition STOP Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel may both be blinking and will continue to blink In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
289. roblem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON STARTING AND OPERATING 261 e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION will be ON even if it was turned off previously Tire Markings ESC he ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partiall OFF zu y isp y 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Ha NOTE o e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European d
290. rovide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied
291. s The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV START or MAR position If the ignition switch is in the STOP position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
292. s done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will perma nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain
293. selected it will reset the Display Clock Audio and Radio Settings to their default settings To restore the settings to their default setting press the Restore Settings button A pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default select Yes to restore or No to exit Once the settings are restored a pop up appears stating settings reset to default Clear Personal Data After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail able e Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets To remove personal information press the Clear Personal Data button and a pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data select Yes or No to exit Once the data has been cleared a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN UCONNECT 5 0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help ful quick tips It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5 0 system Key Features e 5 0 Full Color Touchscreen Display 0440079676 e Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control Uconnect 5 0 e GPS Navigation If Equipped Get Started 1 Visit UconnectPhone com to check mobile device and feature
294. sert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pushing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Push the Power Button 4 to turn On the Tire Service Kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose
295. shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HI Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
296. so that it is comfort able and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the WARNING folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender Seat Belt Extender the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper if when worn the distance between the front edge shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest of the
297. steer ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as pos sible If the Steering icon is flashing it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance If the Steering icon is displayed and the SERVICE POWER STEERING message is displayed on the EVIC screen they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system Once driving conditions are safe pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the Steering icon and the SERVICE POWER STEER ING ASSIST OFF message is displayed on the EVIC screen the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 248 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRA
298. sulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Continued 274 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE e Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response e Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressu
299. t ment in this section 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 1 4L Turbo Engine SAE Grade MOPAR SAE 5W 40 full synthetic engine oil is recom mended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
300. t Means Rear Defrost Light ste This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window de froster automatically turns off after 20 minutes 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illuminates to indi cate function check at vehicle startup If the light remains on after startup or comes on and 6 stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be come inoperative The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting And Operating for furt
301. t finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form 420 NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving m
302. t turned to the AVV START position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un buckled if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all occu pants to buckle their seat belts Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object
303. tances in which crashes and injuries occur a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your l
304. technician 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on
305. ted seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt them path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction WARNING How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt Improper installation of a child restraint to the When using the LATCH attaching system to install a LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being straint The child could be badly injured or killed used by other occupants or being used to secure child Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play exactly when installing an infant or child restraint with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before Child restraint anchorages are designed to with installing a child restraint using the LATCH system stand only those loads imposed by c
306. the oversteering or understeering condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com pares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position STARTING AND OPERATING 257 ESC Off Switch Automatic Transmission ESC Off Switch Manual Transmission NOTE The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column Manual Transmission Only 258 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap propriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exp
307. the cigar lighter with care Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with CUPHOLDERS accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the For the driver and front passenger cupholders are lo generator to recharge the vehicle s battery cated on the floor console between the front seats CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED This is located on the center console in front of the cup holders To activate the cigar lighter push and release the knob After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial position and the cigar lighter is ready for use UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 0309075915 gt 0351 35891 Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders For rear passengers there are cupholders located on the floor between the front driver and passenger seats 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel Pull outward on the glove compart ment latch to open the glove compartment Push the glove compartment door upward to close it Glove Compartment Latch CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Push down the release button located
308. the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON RUN position it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics CAUTION e Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION Continued The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all ve hicle keys with you to an authorized dealer The VIN is required for authorized dealer re
309. then starts a new trip New Trip To reset e Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system manually e When the Trip distance reaches 99999 9 miles or kilometers or when the Travel time reaches 999 59 999 hours and 59 minutes the system is reset auto matically e Disconnecting Reconnecting the battery resets the system NOTE If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B only the infor mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset Start Of Trip Procedure With the ignition on push and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset Exit Trip To exit the Trip function wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Tire Pressure This function will be used to display the tire pressures individually for all four tires by location Trip Functions Both trip functions are resettable reset start of new trip Trip A can be used to display the figures relating to e Trip distance A e Average consumption e Average speed A Travel time A driving time Trip B can be used to display the figures relating to Trip distance B Average co
310. tion of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 90032 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper CAUTION Continued maintenance intervals coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Selection Of Coolant system in an emergency the cooling system will Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible CAUTION Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine be compatible with the engine coolant and may plu
311. tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the ve hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required However change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated
312. tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse CAUTION Continued quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure tion or sensor damage may result when using ec as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety placement equipment that is not of the same size of reasons including the installation of replacement or type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the Sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may TPMS from functioning properly Always check the cause the Tire Pressure Monitorin
313. uckle Switch Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provi
314. unroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position Push the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release the sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof To Close With the sunroof in the full open position pull the power sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second the sunroof will return to the vented position Pull the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second to completely close the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next push the switch forward and release to Express Close Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroo
315. ure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location acces sible to children Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 034164715 Power Sunroof Switch 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In To Open Push and hold the power s
316. using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the transmission controller will expand the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat ing During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine coolant temperature Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera ture has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired
317. using in dusty or off road conditions 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES IE Maintenance Chart Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals i i e e e e e e Mileage or time passed esisisisis 2 2 2 3 S S s S whichever comes first 2 S e e e e eile s32ls id as 2isS5s o o e e e e e e e Q e d CO N e Tt O o N 0 o Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o o o o 2 2 2 S S S S S 2 818183583 5 2 5 13 15 5 85 N co lt e o vto o0oc o SS EJ FE amp 8 S8 a Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints X X X X X Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and re X X X X X X X place if necessary Inspect the brake linings Re place as necessary X X X X X X X a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 Mileage or time passed o o o o oe o o o 2 2 e whichever comes first 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 S S S S S S S alal Elala lR als jl ec rs gj 3 2 Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 gggsgsg sg 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 iloles gt 3 A 0 lt o o e co x lt P Sloe e e 3 8 ae Se 83 Inspect parking brake function X X X X X X X Adjust as necessary Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X Clean and lube sun roof tracks X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs
318. utch pedal and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to stop spinning Should an unwanted clash noise be pro duced the pause length should be increased 232 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE e Clashing REVERSE gear especially if vehicle is mov ing can result in transmission damage e During cold weather until the transmission lubricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the trans mission Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph km h Engine Size Acceleration 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 Rate 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Accel 14 23 29 38 Engine 23 37 47 61 Cruise 12 18 25 32 19 29 40 52 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 233 Downshifting When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade down Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and shift early so that the engine will not be overburdened prolong engine life AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE onl
319. uthorized dealer for service Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi
320. utton on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect touchscreen Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 5 0 Settings Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the settings menu screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable feature settings NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the button on the touch screen to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting and make your selection Once the setting is complete either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings NOTE All settings should be changed with the ignition in the AVV ACC position Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual display settings To change Mode status press and release the Auto or Manual button o
321. vers for the air bag cushions are vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal designed to open only when the air bags are collisions including some that may produce substantial inflating vehicle damage for example some pole collisions e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more truck underrides and angle offset collisions severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In ways wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
322. vertible top components the upper wind shield area the shelf area behind the rear seats or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top e When using the power top button on RKE trans mitter if potential danger exists while lowering the top release the button immediately to interrupt the operation Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key in Things To Know Before Start ing for further information If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 Push the mechanical key release button and release the 2 Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo using a small screwdriver cated on the side of the Key Fob 021441822 020
323. wer outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 0440043699 Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 034662413 CAUTION Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console Aux Power Outlet Continued 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with great caution To avoid serious injury handle
324. windshield and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pushed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 5 A C Button Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation modes at the same time ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows the occupant to select a comfort settings The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience The system can be controlled manually if desired The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the occupant 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 0456043136 Automatic Temperature Controls 1 AUTO Temperature Control ATC Button Controls airflow temperature distribution and air recir culation automatically Push and release to select Per for
325. wise Adjust Fan and de 65 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6650 e AA COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor 4_ If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 77 In very cold weather if you p need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor 25 Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort Information Provided by DEALER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS E STARTING PROCEDURES Cold Weather Operation If Engine Fails To Start Automatic Transmission If Equipped Normal Starting Extended Park Starting After Starting Manual Transmission If Equipped O Turbocharger Cool Down 227 M MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 227 Five Speed Manual Transmission 227 Recommended Shift Speeds 227 Downshifling lt 2 od s ROUES US 228 M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 228 IF EQUIPPED iR x3 RR a 229 Key Ignition Park Interlock 230 O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 230 Six Speed Automatic Transmission Gear Ranges ss acea ea une d a ae s 230 224 STARTING AND OPERATING HN
326. y after selected and the clutch pedal is released Damage to the vehicle has come to a complete stop the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed i e not released e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while grade shifting out of PARK 234 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e Itis dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift an automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE turn the engine OFF apply the parking brake and remove the ign
327. y light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected it will stay on until the fault is cleared If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light rae What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a A chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains un buckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 Electric Power Steering Fail Warning If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Electric Power Steering Fail Warning If Equipped el This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS Power Steering System Re fer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information Brake Warning Light Red Telltale
328. your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued WARNING Continued A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of
329. your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing inter nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you Continued 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Continued WARNING
330. ystem cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Continued 300 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Continued Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow th

2016 FIAT 500/500C Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents